Skip to main content

Full text of "Children's stories in American literature, 1861-1896"

See other formats


Children's 
Stories  in 


NY  PUBLIC  LIBRARY     THE  BRANCH  LIBRARIES 


3  3333  05967  8777 

5'^  U>S    jp^jto 


lUi-  i^u 


THE  ClOTPAL  CHILDREN'S  OXM 
gONIIELL  LISRARY  CENTER 
26  WEST  53  STREET 
1^  YORK,  N.Y.  10019 


/< 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/childrensstories00wrig5 


CHILDREN'S  STORIES 

IN 

AMERICAN    LITERATURE 


BY   THE   SAME   AUTHOR 


Children's  Stories  in  American  Literature, 
1861-1896.     One  vol.,  l2mo     .    .    .  $1.25 

Children's  Stories  in  American  Literature, 
1660-1860.     One  vol.,  l2mo     .    .     .  $1.25 

Children's  Stories  of  American  Progress. 
One  vol.,  l2mo.    Illustrated.    .    .     .$1.25 

Children's  Stories  in  American  History. 
One  vol.,  l2mo.    Illuslrated  .     .     .     .$1.25 

Children's  Stories  of  the  Great  Scientists. 
One  vol.,  l2mo.    Illustrated.     .    .    .  $1.25 

Children's  Stories  in  English  Literature. 
From  Taliesin  to  Shakespeare.  One  vol., 
i2mo $1.25 

Children's  Stories  in  English  Literature. 
From  Shakespeare  to  Tennyson.  One  vol., 
i2mo $1.25 

The  Princess  Lilliwinkins  and  Other  Stories. 
One  vol.,  l2mo.    Illustrated  .    .    .    .  $1.25 


.    CHILDREN'S  Stories 


IN 


AMERICAN  LITERATURE 

1861-1896 


BY 

Henrietta  Christian  Wright 


NEW  YORK 

CHARLES  SCRIBNER'S  SONS 

1909 


THE  NEW  YORK 

^tOR.  LENOX  ANO 


Copyright,  1896,  by 
CHARLES  SCkiBNER'S  SONS 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  I  PAGE 

George  William  Curtis— 1824-1892,  ...  I 

CHAPTER   n 
Richard  Henry  Stoddard— 1825 ,        .       .       .       •      19 

CHAPTER  III 

Edward  Eggleston— 7837 .       ^-'^,  ;'*^i/*       •        •      28 

^CHAPTER   I^ 
Charles  Dudley  Warner- --18:^9 .       •        •       .      50 

CHAPTER  V 

Edmund  Clarence  Stedman— 1833 ,     ....      62 

CHAPTER  VI 
Bret  Harte — 1839 .        .0 72 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  VII  PAGE 

Bayard  Taylor — 1825-1878, 84 

CHAPTER  VIII 
William  Dean  Howells — 1837 , 106 

CHAPTER  IX 
Frances  Hodgson  Burnett— 1849 ,       .        .        .        .125 

CHAPTER  X 
The  Southern  Story  Writers, 138 

CHAPTER  XI 

Louisa  May  ALc!ott77i.8*:?8^,i.888\  ;,  ;.*!:*./:     .        ,        .179 
'•''*•  I.*    *        *  *  V    •  • ' 

■criAptik'-Xii* 

Thomas  Bailey  ALDR{ci^4t^*S6-V4-rV:i  .••       •       •       .196 

CHAPTER  XIII 
New  England  Women  Writers,        .       .        •       •        .    210 

CHAPTER  XIV 
George  W.  Cable— 1844 , 236 


CONTENTS  Vll 


CHAPTER  XV  PACK 

John  Fiske — 1842 , 251 

CHAPTER  XVI 
Mark  Twain— 1835 , 26& 


CHAPTER   I 

GEORGE    WILLIAM    CURTIS 

1824-1892 

In  a  certain  American  classic  there  is  a  pict- 
ure of  a  boy  standing  in  the  shadow  of  an  old 
warehouse  and  living,  in  imagination,  a  day 
that  belonged  to  another  generation.  The 
boy  was  George  William  Curtis,  and  it  was  in 
his  charming  book,  Prue  and  /,  that  he  em- 
bodied this  experience  of  his  boyhood.  In 
the  pages  which  describe  the  past  glories  of 
Providence  the  author  is  picturing  his  native 
city,  and  reproducing  with  an  artist's  touch 
the  atmosphere  which  surrounded  his  childish 
days. 

At  that  time  Providence  was  sharing  the 
fate  of  many  New  England  seaport  towns 
whose  importance  was  passing  away.  The 
old,  red,   steep-roofed  brick  storehouses   were 


GEORGE   WILLIAM    CURTIS 


falling  into  ruins,  the  docks  were  crumbling 
away,  and  the  business  part  of  the  town  was 
almost  deserted.  In  place  of  a  fleet  of  great 
East  India  merchant  -  vessels  moored  to  the 
big  posts,  there  were  only  a  few  insignificant 
sloops  idly  rocking  with  the  tides.  Instead  of 
the  shouting  and  confusion  of  unlading,  there 
was  but  a  group  of  idle  old  sailors  gathered  in 
the  warehouse  doors. 

But  to  the  boy-dreamer  who  looked  on,  the 
silence  and  shadow  of  the  old  stores  seemed 
like  those  of  royal  treasure-houses.  There 
were  still  to  be  seen  piles  of  East  India  wares 
— oriental  stuffs,  dyes,  coffees,  and  spices  whose 
fragrance  brought  Arabia  and  China  to  the 
senses.  Occasionally  a  chance  ship  drifted  in- 
to the  harbor,  and  for  a  few  hours  the  Provi- 
dence wharves  lived  their  old  life.  Once  when 
this  happened,  young  Curtis  crept  along  the 
edge  of  the  dock  after  the  unloading  was  over, 
and  at  great  risk  leaned  over  and  placed  his 
hand  against  the  black  hulk.  And  thus,  he 
records,  he  ''touched  Asia,  Cape  of  Good 
Hope,    and  the    Happy    Islands ;    saw    palm- 


GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 


groves,  jungles,  and  Bengal  tigers,  and  the 
feet  of  Chinese  fairies." 

From  the  gloom  of  the  old  warehouses  he 
would  very  often  go  to  the  sunny  fields  that  lay 
upon  the  hills  back  of  the  town,  and  w^atch 
some  sea-bound  ship,  taking  it  for  a  type  of 
his  fortunes,  which  should  sail  ''stately  and 
successful  to  all  the  glorious  ports  of  the  fut- 
ure." The  picture  is  bright  and  beautiful  with 
the  pure  hopes  of  youth.  It  is  good  to  know 
that  the  dream  of  the  boy  was  a  prophecy  of 
the  noble  life  it  realized. 

Providence  was  the  home  of  young  Curtis 
until  his  sixth  year,  when,  with  his  elder  brother, 
Burrill,  he  went  for  a  time  to  school  at  Jamaica 
Plain,  near  Boston.  From  some  fragments  of 
description  written  many  years  afterward  we 
learn  that  this  experience  was  a  pleasant  one. 
The  school  was  provided  with  large  play- 
grounds, play-hours  were  long  and  study-hours 
short.  Near  by  was  a  pond  for  boating  and 
fishing,  and  beyond  the  village  were  groves  for 
nutting  and  picnics.  The  master's  wife  always 
took  tea  with  the  boys,  and  the  master  himself 


GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 


was  a  good-natured  man  with  a  great  fondness 
for  playing  practical  jokes.  Once  when  he 
knocked  at  the  dormitory  door  during  an  ex- 
citing pillow-fight,  the  boys  turned  the  joke 
upon  him  by  putting  out  the  lights,  and,  pre- 
tending that  they  thought  him  one  of  their 
schoolmates,  pounded  him  so  unmercifully  that 
he  was  glad  to  rush  from  the  room. 

But  there  were  serious  moments,  too,  in 
life.  In  one  of  these  Curtis,  then  about  seven, 
arrayed  himself  in  ministerial  garb  and  solemn- 
ly preached  a  sermon,  from  the  landing  of  the 
stairs,  upon  the  consequences  of  evil-doing. 
Perhaps  it  was  from  the  text  of  this  sermon 
that  he  a  little  later  wrote  a  treatise  on  murder, 
which,  he  said,  always  started  with  Sabbath- 
breaking  ;  the  Sabbath-breaker  became  in  turn 
a  user  of  profane  language,  then  a  thief,  and  so 
went  downward  by  easy  gradations  until  he 
committed  murder.  Such  grave  subjects,  how- 
ever, only  occasionally  depressed  the  spirits 
of  this  happy  flock  of  boys.  Curtis  said  that 
possibly  they  did  not  learn  anything  at  this 
school,  but  that  they  had  plenty  of  good  beef. 


GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS  5 

There  was  a  very  deep  love  and  sympathy 
between  the  Curtis  brothers,  and  their  life  at 
Jamaica  Plain,  and  afterward  when  they  re- 
turned to  Providence,  is  reflected  in  the  work 
of  later  years  where  the  picture  of  the  brother 
is  sketched  with  a  loving  hand. 

While  they  were  still  very  young  boys  they 
heard  in  their  school-room,  at  Providence,  a 
lecture  by  Emerson,  who  was  then  beginning 
to  be  known  as  an  essayist  and  lecturer.  Into 
these  hearts,  which  had  just  left  childhood,  the 
words  of  Emerson  fell  full  of  gracious  inspi- 
ration. He  became  their  teacher  of  noble 
thoughts,  their  leader  into  the  realm  of  moral 
beauty.  Much  as  the  page  of  chivalric  days 
looked  up  to  his  chosen  knight,  they  revered 
with  boyish  hero-worship  the  great  teacher. 
He  gave  them  the  best  things  that  Puritanism 
could  bestow,  and  he  became  a  far-reaching  in- 
fluence in  their  lives. 

The  Curtis  family  removed  to  New  York  in 
1839,  ^^^  the  Providence  school-days  came 
to  an  end.  But  above  all  others  Curtis  al- 
ways called  Emerson  his  teacher  ;  another  trib- 


GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 


ute  to  the  master  to  whom  American  thought 
owes  so  much. 

The  new  home  was  in  Washington  Square, 
then  the  upper  part  of  the  city,  with  the  open 
country  not  far  away.  The  best-known  people 
of  the  day — writers,  artists,  musicians,  lovers  of 
all  art — found  their  way  to  the  Curtis  home. 
This  companionship,  together  with  systematic 
study,  fostered  rapid  intellectual  growth  ;  the 
boys  made  progress,  but  city  life  did  not  en- 
tirely please  them.  About  this  time  the  Com- 
munity of  Brook  Farm  was  founded  by  the 
men  destined  to  be  among  the  intellectual  lead- 
ers of  America.  Every  member  was  pledged 
to  help  with  the  manual  labor,  and  to  contrib- 
ute his  share  toward  the  intellectual  life.  It 
was  a  dream  of  the  old  Utopia,  where  life  was 
simple  and  happiness  abounded.  The  Curtis 
brothers  begged  their  father  to  let  them  go 
and  share  this  ideal  home,  and  he  consented. 
Although  they  went  as  boarders  and  did  not 
become  actual  members  of  the  community,  its 
life  was  theirs.  Here,  where  Emerson,  Haw- 
thorne,   and    Dana    ploughed   and    hoed   and 


GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 


planted,  the  two  boys  did  their  share.  They 
drove  cows,  raked  hay,  and  pulled  weeds  in 
the  morning  ;  in  the  afternoon  they  studied 
German,  chemistry,  and  music  ;  in  the  evening 
they  danced  or  sang,  had  theatrical  representa- 
tions or  talked  philosophy. 

Young  Curtis  absorbed  the  healthy  atmos- 
phere of  this  unconventional  yet  inspiring  life, 
as  he  breathed  the  air  from  the  dewy  meadows 
and  wild-rose  hedges.  It  was  a  part  of  the 
hope  and  aspiration  of  youth  brought  down 
to  actual  touch,  and  he  formed  here  more  than 
one  abiding  and  uplifting  friendship. 

The  charm  of  the  life  did  not  quite  dissolve 
when  the  brothers  returned  to  New  York,  for 
within  a  few  months  they  were  again  in  the 
country  as  inmates  of  a  farmhouse  near  Con- 
cord. Here  they  did  farm  work,  made  their 
own  beds,  cultivated  a  little  garden,  joined  a 
club  of  which  Emerson  and  Hawthorne  were 
members,  and,  in  fact,  lived  and  did  quite  as 
they  pleased.  It  was  camp  life  with  some  of 
the  discomforts  left  out  and  some  privileges 
added,  and   it   was  an  idyllic  existence  for  a 


8  GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 

youth  who  did  not  know  just  what  he  should 
make  of  life,  but  who  had  determined  that  he 
would  make  of  it  something  noble. 

While  at  Concord  Curtis  wrote  two  charm- 
ing little  stories  that  may  be  called  a  prelude 
to  his  literary  career.  One  of  these  tales  is 
that  of  the  strange  sights  seen  by  a  little  girl 
who  possesses  a  pair  of  magic  spectacles.  It 
is  full  of  the  poetic  grace  of  a  genuine  folk- 
story.  In  the  chapter  on  Titbottom's  Specta- 
cles in  Prue  and  /,  the  same  motif  is  used. 
Neither  of  the  stories  has  ever  been  published. 

His  career  was  still  undecided  when,  in  his 
twenty-second  year,  Curtis  sailed  for  Europe 
and  a  trip  to  the  East.  Although  calling  no 
college  his  Alma  Mater  he  was  still  the  repre- 
sentative cultivated  young  American  of  his  day. 
He  was  well  read  in  the  German,  Italian,  and 
English  classics,  appreciated  the  best  music, 
was  a  student  of  aesthetics,  and  had  an  earnest 
and  intelligent  interest  in  politics.  He  be- 
Heved  that  America,  as  embodying  the  idea  of 
self-government  of  states,  had  a  mission  to  the 
world.     In  his  soul   he   consecrated   his    best 


GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 


powers  to  the  service  of  humanity,  and  he 
was  ready,  when  the  moment  came,  to  serve 
it  without  thought  of  cost  to  himself.  The 
ocean  travellers  of  those  days  took  passage  in 
packet-ships,  and  Curtis  was  forty-six  days  in 
crossing  to  France.  He  spent  four  years 
abroad,  making  the  usual  tours.  He  kept  a 
diary,  which  became  a  record  of  charming  in- 
terest, but  most  of  which  remained  unpub- 
lished. During  this  time  he  sent  letters  to  the 
New  York  Tribicne,  devoted  to  the  public 
questions  of  the  day.  The  fact  that  he  chose 
to  write  thus,  while  surrounded  by  the  Old 
World  impressions,  shows  the  trend  of  his 
mind  toward  the  higher  political  interests  in 
which  he  became  a  leader. 

During  this  trip  Curtis  seems  to  have  made 
up  his  mind  to  a  literary  career.  Soon  after 
his  return  he  began  to  lecture,  and  a  little 
later  went  on  the  staff  of  the  Tribune.  The 
Nile  Notes  of  a  Howadji  is  the  record  of 
a  trip  up  the  Nile,  and  was  the  first  book 
that  Curtis  published.  Like  Longfellow's 
Hyperion,  it   has   more  than  a   literary  value 


lO  GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 

as  being  the  actual  experience  of  one  who 
was  to  become  prominent  in  American  liter- 
ature. In  these  chapters  the  author  did  not 
aim  at  literal  description.  He  was  rather 
the  happy  traveller  transcribing  for  absent 
friends  the  pictures  of  the  lands  they  have  so 
often  visited  together  in  imagination. 

He  made  himself  story-teller  to  the  fireside 
group,  and  scene  after  scene  was  sketched  with 
faithful  hand.  To  this  young  dreamer  Egypt 
still  remained  the  land  of  wonder  and  inspira- 
tion, though  its  temples  lay  in  ruins  and  its  peo- 
ple had  sunk  to  the  lowest  level  of  humanity. 
There  is  a  wondrous  charm  in  his  sympathy 
with  that  great  past,  and  in  his  appreciation  of 
the  ideals  of  the  race  whose  art  and  science 
laid  their  mark  ineffaceably  upon  the  world. 
The  paintings  in  the  pyramids  and  tombs  of 
the  common  people,  illustrating  the  victories  of 
the  kings,  the  occupations  of  the  lower  classes, 
and  even  the  games  of  the  children,  all  pict- 
ured in  colors  still  fresh,  had  a  wonderful  fas- 
cination for  the  young  traveller.  In  gazing  at 
them  he  forgot  the  Egypt  that  he  actually  saw 


GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS  II 

and  seemed  to  touch  hands  with  a  vanished 
race. 

It  throws  a  bright  light  on  the  character 
of  the  author  to  see  him  thus  able  to  make 
that  old  inspiration  his  own.  Without  the 
Nile  Notes  we  should  never  have  known  so 
well  the  ambitions  of  his  young  manhood 
when  he  was  a  dreamer  of  dreams.  The  chap- 
ters on  the  every-day  occurrences  of  the  trips 
are  also  full  of  interest,  and  touched  with  the 
author's  characteristic  humor. 

The  natives  called  all  travellers  howadji — 
shopkeepers  —  for  such  they  conceived  to  be 
the  occupation  of  the  wandering  Europeans 
and  Americans  who  visited  their  land.  To  the 
native  imagination  the  howadji  was  a  being 
created  to  bestow  bakshish,  or  alms,  to  buy 
bits  of  mummy  bones,  or  even  whole  mum- 
mies, and  to  be  cheated  upon  every  occasion. 
Curtis  refused  to  be  cheated,  gave  bakshish 
only  to  the  ''miserable,  old,  and  Mind,"  and 
struck  his  followers  dumb  by  insisting  upon 
doing  nothing  for  long  hours  but  sit  gazing 
upon  a  pyramid  or  ruined  temple. 


12  GEORGE   WILLIAM    CURTIS 

The  journey  up  and  down  the  Nile  occu- 
pied two  months,  and  the  record  of  it  will 
always  be  interesting  as  embodying  the  expe- 
riences of  the  Nile  traveller  in  1848.  The  ht- 
erary  charm  of  the  book  is  great,  many  of  the 
passages  being  in  reality  unrhymed  poems  of 
peculiar  beauty.  This  volume  was  published 
in  the  spring  of  1851,  and  was  well  received. 
There  was  an  English  edition  which  received 
many  flattering  notices,  and  this  success  con- 
firmed the  author  in  his  determination  to  make 
literature  his  profession. 

Mr.  Curtis's  next  book,  A  Howadji  in 
Syria,  continued  his  journeyings  in  the  East 
through  Syria  and  Palestine.  It  is  written  in 
the  style  of  the  earlier  work,  and  partakes  of 
the  same  charm. 

His  third  book,  Lotus-Eati7ig,  had  origi- 
nally appeared  in  the  Tribune  as  a  series  of 
letters  written  during  a  summer's  journeyings 
through  the  Berkshire  Hills,  at  Newport,  and 
other  sea-coast  places,  and  at  Niagara.  This 
book  is  in  Curtis's  most  delicate  vein.  Lotus- 
Eating  was  illustrated  by  Kensett,  one  of  the 


GEORGE  WILLIAM   CURTIS  1 3 

most  popular  artists  of  the  day,  and  a  warm 
friend  of  the  author.  Both  text  and  drawings 
recall  to-day  the  grace  and  beauty  of  some  old 
miniature  in  its  quaint  setting,  a  reflection  of 
another  and  more  picturesque  age. 

The  Potiphar  Papers  followed  Lohts-Eat- 
ing,  and  showed  Curtis  in  the  light  of  a 
teacher  of  manners  and  morals  to  what  was 
called  the  best  society.  The  Potiphar  family 
was  a  picture  of  the  rich  American  without 
cultivation,  and  with  no  other  ambition  than  to 
live  in  finer  houses,  have  better  horses,  and 
give  more  expensive  dinners  than  the  rest  of 
the  world.  In  a  series  of  letters  by  Mr.  and 
Mrs.  Potiphar  and  their  friends  the  author 
shows  the  folly  of  such  silly  ambitions. 

But  the  book  which  brought  Mr.  Curtis  the 
most  fame,  both  because  of  its  artistic  ex- 
cellence and  high  literary  value,  is  that  charm- 
ing idyll,  Prtte  and  I.  In  these  pages  the 
hero  is  an  old  book-keeper  who  lives  in  a 
humble  way  in  an  unfashionable  street.  But 
the  book-keeper  counts  himself  rich  because 
of  his  many  castles  in  Spain,  whither  he  often 


14  GEORGE   WILLIAM   CURTIS 

travels,  and  about  which  he  writes  many  de- 
lightful descriptions.  There  are  other  char- 
acters in  the  book  who  also  own  castles  in 
Spain.  Titbottom,  the  under-book-keeper,  and 
Bourne,  the  millionnaire,  share  and  share  alike 
in  this  wonderful  property,  which  one  is  never 
too  poor  to  own,  and  never  too  rich  not  to  de- 
sire. Each  one  tells  stories  in  which  Moorish 
palaces,  marble  fountains,  moonlit  balconies. 
West  Indian  sunsets,  and  tropical  flowers  are 
woven  into  an  arabesque  of  color ;  but  some- 
how all  suggest  a  dreamy-eyed  boy  lying  upon 
a  sunny  hill-slope  watching  an  East  Indian 
merchantman  sail  out  of  Providence  harbor 
and  fade  away  into  a  dim  horizon. 

There  is  one  sweet  and  touching  chapter 
called  *'  My  Cousin  the  Curate,"  in  which  Cur- 
tis pays  loving  tribute  to  the  character  of  his 
brother  Burrill.  In  the  pages  "  Sea  from 
Shore  "  is  found  that  charming  description  of 
Providence  in  his  youth,  and  *'  The  Flying 
Dutchman "  is  the  immortal  legend  trans- 
formed anew.  Throughout  the  book  are 
many  pictures  of  the  New  York  of  forty  years 


GEORGE  WILLIAM   CURTIS  1 5 

ago  ;  what  was  then  fashionable  in  manner, 
dress,  and  appointment ;  the  favorite  actor,  the 
most  popular  opera,  the  newest  book,  all  are 
gossiped  about  by  the  old  book-keeper  who 
looks  on.  The  descriptions,  with  their  quaint 
fancies  and  poetic  rendering,  are  alike  rich  in 
retrospective  value. 

Both  the  Potiphar  Papers  and  Prue  and 
I  appeared  first  serially  in  Putnam  s  Monthly, 
of  which  Curtis  was  for  a  time  associate  editor. 
Five  years  after  the  publication  of  his  first 
book  Mr.  Curtis  took  a  position  on  Harper  s 
Magazine,  and  inaugurated  the  Easy  Chair. 
These  delightful  papers,  which  now  are  col- 
lected in  several  volumes,  included  criticisms  on 
art,  literature,  music,  social  events,  and  similar 
topics,  and  were  a  never-ending  source  of  inter- 
est and  delight  to  his  audience.  Like  that  of 
Holmes,  in  the  Atlantic,  it  was  a  purely  liter- 
ary office,  and  it  showed,  as  no  other  review 
could,  the  wide  intellectual  sympathy  of  the 
editor.  The  Easy  Chair  was  conducted  for 
thirty-eight  years  by  Mr.  Curtis,  being  discon- 
tinued at  his  death 


l6  GEORGE  WILLIAM   CURTIS 

In  1863  Curtis  accepted  the  position  of 
editor  of  Harper  s  Weekly.  Perhaps  no  oth- 
er American  writer  has  ever  been  in  such 
pecuHar  touch  with  the  people  as  was  the 
editor  of  the  Weekly  at  this  time.  It  was 
not  a  purely  literary  sympathy,  for  from  the 
beginning  his  interest  in  public  questions  was 
reflected  in  the  editorial  page.  Whatever 
vexing  problem  faced  Congress,  whatever 
measure  in  relation  to  government  or  reform 
was  before  the  people,  was  used  as  a  text  by 
the  lay  preacher  of  the  Weekly.  The  most 
unbounded  respect  was  his,  even  from  those 
whose  opinion  differed  from  his  own,  while  his 
admirers  learned  to  wait  for  the  cool  judgment 
and  the  wise  word  which  never  failed.  Mr. 
Curtis  was  a  strong  friend  of  the  anti-slavery 
cause,  and  both  before  and  during  the  war  he 
unflinchingly  advocated  its  rights,  though  his 
course  cost  him  more  than  one  personal  friend. 
During  this  period  as  a  lecturer  and  delegate  to 
conventions  he  reflected  the  creed  of  the  na- 
tional party.  He  was  nominated  for  Congress 
and  accepted  the  nomination,  though  he  antic- 


GEORGE  WILLIAM   CURTIS  1/ 

ipated  the  defeat  that  awaited  him  in  a  State 
where  his  party  was  weak.  Throughout  the 
entire  struggle  he  stood  side  by  side  with  the 
great  reformers,  one  of  the  most  interesting 
figures  of  that  stormy  period. 

Perhaps  the  public  movement  with  which 
Mr.  Curtis's  name  will  remain  most  closely 
associated  is  the  Civil  Service  Reform  Com- 
mission, of  which  he  was  the  first  president 
and  always  the  leading  spirit.  The  object  of 
this  commission  was  to  obtain  legal  power  to 
advance  all  Government  clerks  and  employees 
by  regular  promotions,  in  place  of  the  political 
patronage  which  then  obtained.  This  cam- 
paign for  purer  public  service  was  begun  in 
1 871,  and  from  that  time  Mr.  Curtis's  work 
for  it  was  unceasing,  until  the  hopes  of  the 
reformers  were  fulfilled  by  the  passage  of  the 
Civil  Service  Reform  Law,  which  led  the  way 
in  time  to  the  needed  reform. 

From  the  beginning  of  his  literary  career  Mr. 
Curtis  had  been  known  as  a  lecturer  of  singular 
power.  His  lectures  embraced  a  wide  variety 
of  subjects,  some   of  the  most  famous  being 


1 8  GEORGE  WILLIAM   CURTIS 

those  delivered  before  colleges  and  at  the  meet- 
ings of  the  Chamber  of  Commerce  in  New 
York.  Seventeen  of  these  addresses  alone 
were  devoted  to  the  civil  service  reform  cause. 
His  orations  on  the  *'  Reunion  of  the  Army  of 
the  Potomac  ; "  on  "  Wendell  Phillips  ;  "  ''James 
Russell  Lowell;"  *' Burns;"  "The  Puritan 
Principle ;"  "The  Duty  of  the  American  Citizen 
to  Politics,"  and  other  varied  topics  indicate  the 
wide  scope  of  this  work.  The  abiding  affec- 
tion which  he  had  inspired  in  the  people  at 
large  made  him  one  of  the  favorite  orators  at 
many  commemorations  of  national  importance. 
His  orations  and  addresses  are  collected  in  thir- 
teen volumes,  and,  with  the  Harper  s  Weekly 
editorials,  form  a  scholarly  review  of  one  of 
the  most  interesting  periods  of  American  his- 
tory. 

Mr.   Curtis's   home  was   on    Staten  Island, 
where  he  died,  in  1893. 


CHAPTER  II 

RICHARD    HENRY    STODDARD 

1825— 

The  first  recollections  of  Richard  Henry 
Stoddard,  like  those  of  so  many  of  our  Amer- 
ican men  of  letters,  are  of  the  sea.  He  was 
born  at  Hingham,  Mass.,  a  little  seaport  town, 
where  his  ancestors  had  lived  for  generations, 
and  whence  his  father.  Captain  Stoddard, 
sailed  away  in  his  ship  one  day  never  to  return. 
Somewhere  between  New  York  and  the  coast 
of  Norway  the  brave  little  brig  in  which 
Captain  Stoddard  had  invested  all  his  fortune 
went  down.  Perhaps  it  struck  an  iceberg, 
or  in  the  darkness  of  the  northern  sea  mists 
came  into  collision  with  another  vessel ;  no  one 
ever  heard  its  fate,  and  the  widow  and  father- 
less children  only  knew  that  to  them  had  come 
that  bitter  portion  which  the  sea  gives  to  so 


20  RICHARD   HENRY   STODDARD 

many  of  its  followers.  For  the  first  few  years 
of  his  life  young  Stoddard  had  hardly  any  set- 
tled home,  his  mother  moving  from  place  to 
place,  whenever  a  chance  of  bettering  her  fort- 
unes presented  itself.  For  a  year  or  two  he 
was  at  his  grandfather's  house  at  Hingham^, 
which  was  situated  on  a  hill  overlooking  the 
ocean,  and  below  which  was  the  graveyard 
where  generations  of  seafaring  folk  lay  buried. 
Among  the  memories  which  shine  out  from 
these  earliest  years  are  those  of  the  old  church 
at  Hingham,  where  he  solemnly  sat  in  the  old- 
fashioned  high-backed  pew,  and  of  the  admir- 
ing friends  who,  perhaps,  on  that  same  Sunday 
afternoon,  pressed  round  him  while  he  gravely 
recited  one  of  Watts's  hymns  or  some  other 
of  the  pieces  of  which  he  had  store.  There  is 
also  a  remembrance  of  a  trip  to  Boston  in  his 
grandfather's  schooner,  an  adventurous  voyage 
no  doubt  to  the  small  seafarer.  From  Hing- 
ham he  went  to  live  in  several  other  New 
England  towns,  never  staying  long  in  one 
place,  and  settling  at  last  in  Boston,  from 
which   place,   in   his   tenth   year,  he  removed 


RICHARD   HENRY   STODDARD  21 

to  New  York  on  his  mother's  second  mar- 
riage. 

In  all  his  sojournings  he  had  never  been 
quite  out  of  sight  and  sound  of  the  sea,  and  it 
was  from  this  teacher  no  doubt  that  he  learned 
to  be  a  worshipper  of  beauty.  Years  after- 
ward, when  he  began  to  translate  his  thoughts 
and  emotions  into  verse,  we  find  much  of  it 
touched  with  that  indefinable,  haunting  mys- 
tery which  is  found  only  in  the  poetry  of  sea- 
lovers.  And  this  quality  is  no  doubt  a  remi- 
niscence of  those  childish  impressions  which 
sank  into  his  mind  and  became  a  part  of  it. 

Stoddard's  life  in  New  York  was  varied  in 
experience,  although  he  had  for  the  first  time  a 
settled  home.  The  family  was  poor,  and  Stod- 
dard went  to  school  or  became  a  bread-winner 
alternately,  as  their  fortunes  ebbed  or  flowed. 
At  the  age  of  fifteen  he  found  himself  con- 
fronted with  the  fact  that  the  boy  who  eats 
bread  and  butter  sometimes  has  to  help  pay  for 
it  to  the  extent  of  all  his  small  might,  and  young 
as  he  was  even  then,  he  had  no  notion  of 
shirking  his  duty.     He  became  first  the  office- 


22  RICHARD   HENRY   STODDARD 


boy  to  a  firm  of  two  young  lawyers,  who  had 
few  clients,  but  who,  nevertheless,  advised  him 
to  forget  poetry  and  study  law.  He  worked 
for  a  time  in  a  newspaper  office  ;  then  he  be- 
came book-keeper  in  a  factory.  For  three  or 
four  days  he  tried  earnestly  to  become  a  black- 
smith, and  at  last,  after  much  shifting  of  scene, 
he  settled  in  a  foundry  and  learned  the  trade 
of  iron-moulding. 

But  to  his  mind  the  actual  boy  neither 
copied  lawyers'  briefs,  nor  handled  an  anvil, 
nor  moulded  iron.  For  in  that  world  which 
he  had  created  for  himself  he  did  nothing  the 
livelong  day  but  think  and  write  poetry. 
Sometimes  the  poetry  would  be  scribbled  down 
in  the  short  noon  recess,  but  oftener  the  hours 
of  the  night  were  given  to  writing,  rewriting, 
correcting,  and  revising  the  verse  which  he 
was  sure  must  lead  into  the  pleasant  ways  of 
life  at  last. 

Whatever  odd  moments  he  had  that  were 
not  given  to  writing  poetry  were  spent  in 
reading  it.  Out  of  his  small  salary  his  moth- 
er allowed  him  a  little  spending  money,  and 


RICHARD    HENRY    STODDARD  23 

with  this  he  bought  books.  Usually  they  were 
second  -  hand  volumes,  picked  up  on  street- 
stands,  but  occasionally  a  new  book  found  its 
way  to  the  library,  which  grew  year  by  year, 
and  was  a  mute  record  of  the  boy's  ambitions. 
In  this  way  Stoddard  became  familiar  with  the 
best  English  poetry,  and  so  got  an  education 
not  then  to  be  had  in  many  schools. 

After  several  books  of  manuscript  poetry  had 
been  filled  and  destroyed,  for  he  seems  to  have 
understood  that  this  writing  was  only  a  train- 
ing, he  at  last  ventured  to  offer  a  poem  to  a 
weekly  magazine,  which  accepted  it,  and  the 
young  poet  actually  saw  himself  in  print. 
About  the  same  time  he  received  some  encour- 
aging criticisms  from  the  poet  N.  P.  Willis, 
who  saw  a  little  volume  of  his  manuscript. 
His  most  valuable  acquaintance  at  this  time 
was  Mrs.  Kirkland,  the  editor  of  a  magazine, 
who  not  only  praised  the  young  poet,  but 
bought  some  of  his  work  for  her  magazine. 
Other  successes  followed,  and  finally  Stoddard 
had  saved  enough  money  to  have  a  volume  of 
his  poems  published  ;    although   he  only  sold 


24  RICHARD   HENRY   STODDARD 

one  copy  of  these  poems,  which  was  published 
under  the  title  Footprints,  it  yet  tended  to 
help  him  materially,  for  it  brought  him  to  the 
notice  of  literary  people.  Like  many  another 
poet,  Stoddard  owed  much  of  his  success  to  the 
kindly  and  generous  sympathy  of  older  and 
successful  writers.  This  little  volume  led  to 
his  being  introduced  to  the  best  literary  so- 
ciety of  New  York,  and  that  was  of  inesti- 
mable value  to  the  then  unknown  poet.  In 
1852,  being  then  in  his  twenty-eighth  year, 
Stoddard  published  a  second  volume  of  poems, 
and  a  year  later,  through  the  influence  of  Haw- 
thorne, he  obtained  a  position  as  clerk  in  the 
Custom  House,  a  place  which  brought  him  an 
assured  income,  and  yet  gave  leisure  for  his 
literary  work. 

In  this  same  year  he  published  two  dainty 
volumes  for  children,  Fairy  Land  and  Town 
and  Country.  They  are  full  of  delightful 
humor  and  show  the  poet  in  one  of  his  hap- 
piest moods. 

The  life  of  Stoddard  has  been  emphatically 
that  of  the  poet  and  student.     His  whole  ca- 


RICHARD   HENRY   STODDARD  2$ 

reer  has  been  colored  by  one  ambition,  the 
highest  that  can  govern  any  writer,  to  succeed 
in  his  chosen  calling  and  do  honor  to  Ameri- 
can literature.  Besides  his  poems,  which  have 
passed  through  many  editions  since  the  ap- 
pearance of  his  first  little  volume,  he  has 
been  connected  with  various  newspapers  and 
has  been  the  editor  of  a  magazine.  Among 
other  things  he  has  also  edited  Griswold's 
Poets  of  America^  The  Female  Poets  of  Amer- 
tea,  an  edition  of  the  Late  English  Poets,  and 
a  collection  of  reminiscences  of  well-known 
writers  known  as  the  Bric-a-Brac  Series.  Since 
1880  he  has  been  editor  of  the  literary  depart- 
ment of  the  New  York  Mail  and  Express. 

To  all  this  miscellaneous  work  Stoddard  has 
brought  the  trained  intellect  and  artistic  per- 
ception of  the  poet  and  student,  and  he  has 
stamped  much  of  it  with  more  than  an  ephem- 
eral value.  His  work  on  the  Mail  and  Ex- 
press is  a  weekly  review  of  the  literary  work 
of  the  world,  and  is  a  good  summary  of  the 
intellectual  field  of  the  day. 

Some  of  the  finest  examples  of  his  poems 


26  RICHARD    HENRY   STODDARD 

are  found  in  the  collections,  Songs  of  Sum- 
mer, The  King's  Bell  and  The  Book  of  the 
East.  Single  examples,  such  as  the  Vanished 
May,  Up  in  the  Trees,  The  Grape  Gatherer, 
Dead  Leaves,  show  his  sense  of  beauty,  min- 
gled with  the  old  Greek  love  of  the  earth,  in 
perfect  poetic  union.  In  these  moods  he  is 
a  true  descendant  of  the  early  poet  worship- 
pers of  nature.  Wratislaw,  the  story  of  a  lit- 
tle hero  prince,  whose  brave  spirit  wrought 
noble  deeds  in  the  days  when  the  Turk  over- 
ran Europe,  is  a  beautiful  specimen  of  the 
poet's  art  in  dealing  with  legendary  subjects. 
So  also  is  his  Masque  of  the  Three  Kings,  in 
which  the  old  Bible  Christmas  Story  is  told 
anew.  A  Wedding  Under  the  Directory  is  a 
quaint  picture  of  a  day,  relived  by  another 
generation.  In  1876  Stoddard  was  asked  for 
a  poem  to  celebrate  the  opening  of  the  Cen- 
tennial Exposition,  and  responded  with  his 
Guests  of  the  State,  a  noble  composition,  full 
of  that  large  sympathy,  which  made  the  occa- 
sion a  memorable  one  in  the  history  of  the 
natioru 


RICHARD    HENRY   STODDARD  2/ 

The  fact  that  most  impresses  one  in  regard 
to  his  work  is  his  intense  feeling  for  beauty. 
And  in  this  sense  one  can  trace  his  literary 
career  from  his  earliest  years.  Such  a  nature 
must  have  unconsciously  been  nurtured  in 
those  exalted  moods  which  are  revealed  only 
to  the  poet  born.  Through  all  his  best  work 
there  is  an  undertone  which  is  felt  rather  than 
seen,  and  which  hints  of  a  deeper  current  un- 
derneath. 

Some  of  his  most  charming  work  appears  in 
transcriptions  of  the  poetry  of  the  East — love- 
songs  of  the  Tartar  and  Arab,  of  the  Persian 
and  the  Sclav.  With  true  poetic  sympathy  he 
has  wrought  these  pictures  of  Eastern  life  into 
English  verse  that  reveals  all  their  own  wild 
force  and  fire. 

Stoddard's  life  has  been  spent  almost  entire- 
ly in  New  York.  As  he  has  devoted  all  his 
talent  to  his  chosen  work,  so  he  has  reaped  the 
reward  that  comes  from  such  high  endeavor, 
and  won  in  its  best  sense  the  poet's  fame. 


CHAPTER  III 

EDWARD    EGGLESTON 

1837— 

In  all  the  stories  which  relate  to  the  settle- 
ment of  the  United  States  none  are  more  in- 
teresting than  those  which  tell  of  the  experi- 
ences of  the  pioneers  who  fought  face  to  face 
with  the  Indians  in  the  valley  of  the  Ohio. 

From  the  time  when  Daniel  Boone  and  his 
companions  followed  Indian  trails  across  the 
Alleghenies  and  settled  Kentucky,  until  far  be- 
yond the  period  of  the  Revolution,  the  history 
of  every  settlement  on  the  frontier  was  one  of 
bitter  warfare  with  the  red  men.  Before  he 
could  build  his  house  or  prepare  the  land  for 
tilling,  the  frontiersman  had  to  erect  a  block- 
house to  protect  the  settlement  against  his 
wily  foe,  and  very  often  this  fort-like  structure 
was  the  home  for  weeks  at  a  time  of  the  entire 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  29 

community.  Whether  the  pioneer  felled  trees, 
broke  up  the  new  ground,  sowed,  tilled,  or 
gathered  his  crops  he  worked  ever  with  his 
rifle  by  his  side.  And  the  housewife,  busy 
with  spinning,  weaving,  and  other  family  cares, 
never  went  to  her  door  without  an  anxious 
glance  to  see  that  no  lurking  enemy  was  near. 
Very  often,  too,  in  spite  of  all  precaution,  the 
smoke  rising  from  his  burning  dwelling  would 
be  the  first  w^arning  that  the  settler  would  re- 
ceive, and  he  would  hasten  home  to  find  his 
wife  and  children  slaughtered  or  carried  away 
into  captivity. 

It  required  brave  hearts  to  found  homes  on 
the  frontier,  where  even  nature  gave  only  in 
return  for  hardest  toil,  and  still  braver  ones 
to  work  steadily  on  in  the  face  of  treacherous 
Indian  foes.  But  the  pioneer  of  the  Ohio  Val- 
ley did  not  know  fear,  and  his  record  of  honor- 
able accomplishment  has  made  him  a  famous 
character  in  the  story  of  his  country. 

An  old  block-house  of  this  region,  the  first 
that  was  erected  on  the  Indiana  side  of  the 
Ohio,    was   built    by   Captain    Craig,  a  noted 


30  EDWARD   EGGLESTON 

pioneer,  who  won  renown  both  as  a  fighter 
against  the  Indians  and  as  a  leader  in  the  ht- 
tie  band  of  settlers.  It  was  men  of  this  class, 
resolute,  brave,  and  self-sacrificing,  which  re- 
deemed the  Valley  of  the  Ohio  from  nature 
and  the  red  man  and  made  it  habitable. 

And  although  the  struggle  went  on  for 
years,  it  ended  at  last  in  peace  and  prosperity 
for  the  pioneers.  The  Indians  retreated  tow- 
ard the  Mississippi,  thriving  little  villages 
grew  up  around  the  old  block  -  houses,  and 
the  outlying  country,  rich  in  valuable  timber 
or  meadow  lands,  was  as  free  from  danger  as 
the  valleys  of  the  Connecticut  or  Hudson. 

In  Vevay,  Ind.,  one  of  these  little  villages, 
about  four  miles  from  the  old  block-house, 
was  born  on  December  lo,  1837,  Edward 
Eggleston,  a  grandson  of  Captain  Craig.  His 
father,  a  descendant  of  a  Virginia  family  which 
had  won  honor  in  the  Revolution,  was  a 
prominent  lawyer  of  Vevay,  where  the  boy 
lived  until  his  third  year.  The  family  then  re- 
moved to  the  old  Craig  homestead,  and  in  this 
region,    so   rich  in    historic  memories,    young 


EDWARD    EGGLESTON  3 1 

Eggleston  spent  six  of  the  most  impression- 
able years  of  his  life.  As  he  was  a  delicate 
boy,  school  life  occupied  a  very  small  part  of 
his  time,  though  books  were  always  interesting 
to  him.  He  above  all  implored  to  be  taught 
to  write,  and  almost  as  soon  as  he  knew  how 
to  write  he  began  to  express  his  own  thoughts, 
of  which  he  had  many.  But  the  best  education 
he  could  have  had  for  the  work  he  was  to  do 
was  obtained  from  the  still  lingering  pictur- 
esqueness  of  Western  life,  which  surrounded 
him  everywhere. 

Life  was  still  primitive  enough  in  the  Ohio 
Valley,  and  the  interests  of  the  people  were  so 
closely  allied  that  they  seemed  almost  like  one 
large  family.  If  a  man  wished  to  build  a  house 
or  barn,  he  summoned  his  neighbors  to  what 
was  called  ''  a  raising,"  when  all  worked  to 
raise  the  building  on  its  foundations.  The 
crop  of  corn  was  husked  at  a  '*  bee,"  to  which 
all  the  country  lads  and  lasses  came,  and  after 
dividing  into  two  companies,  worked  hard  till 
one  or  the  other  won  the  race  by  husking  the 
last   ear   first.     A   supper    in    the   farm-house 


32  EDWARD   EGGLESTON 

kitchen  and  a  dance  in  the  barn  would  follow, 
when  the  guests  would  separate,  to  meet  per- 
haps the  next  night  at  another  **bee."  Wood 
was  chopped,  logs  rolled  from  the  forests  to 
the  river,  where  they  were  floated  down  to 
the  sawmills,  and  every  other  kind  of  farm 
work  done  in  the  same  way.  In  the  house- 
holds the  women  had  spinning  and  quilting 
"  bees,"  and,  in  fact,  from  the  oldest  to  the 
youngest,  each  member  of  the  community  felt 
that  he  had  its  interests  at  heart. 

While  the  frontier  life  had  developed  a  cer- 
tain class  who  were  rough  in  manner  and  care- 
less in  morals,  the  greater  part  of  the  people 
were  Methodists,  and  were  sincerely  and  en- 
thusiastically devoted  to  their  religion.  In 
those  widely  scattered  communities  churches 
were  almost  unknown,  and  services  were  held 
in  the  school-rooms  or  at  private  houses,  as 
might  be  most  desirable.  The  ministers  were 
as  a  rule  men  of  character  and  force,  descend- 
ants in  the  next  generation  of  stalwart  Indian 
fighters  and  frontiersmen,  and  into  their  work 
they  put  the  same  energy  which  their  fathers 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  33 

and  grandfathers  had  used  in  winning  homes 
in  the  wilderness. 

These  Methodist  ministers  were  called  cir- 
cuit-riders ;  they  had  no  settled  parish,  but 
each  one  had  charge  of  from  fifty  to  one  hun- 
dred parishes,  which  they  were  required  to  visit 
as  often  as  possible.  With  his  saddle-bags  and 
rifle  the  circuit-rider  would  travel  from  village 
to  village,  claiming  hospitality  from  the  fami- 
lies under  his  care,  who  ahvays  welcomed  him 
gladly,  placed  their  houses  at  his  disposal,  and  if 
the  meeting  was  to  be  held  in  the  school-house, 
stood  ready  to  guard  him  from  the  attacks  of 
any  of  the  rough  class  who  might  try  to  inter- 
fere with  him.  The  circuit-rider  was  undoubt- 
edly the  greatest  influence  for  good  known  to 
the  Ohio  Valley,  and  his  respect  and  esteem 
were  sought  by  all.  He  did  his  work  well,  in- 
fusing into  the  daily  life  of  his  followers  an 
earnest  desire  for  right-doing  and  a  hunger  for 
spirituality  which  had  a  lasting  effect  upon 
the  characters  of  the  builders  of  the  Middle 
West.  One  of  Eggleston's  first  memories 
must  have  been  that  of  the  circuit-rider  riding 

3 


34  EDWARD   EGGLESTON 

up  to  the  door  of  his  grandfather's  house  and 
dismounting,  while  the  heads  of  the  family- 
stood  ready  to  welcome  him  with  respectful 
courtesy.  And  the  mind-picture  photographed 
thus  vividly  was  to  be  reproduced  later  and 
form  a  unique  contribution  to  American  lit- 
erature. 

From  the  old  homestead  the  family  removed 
to  Vevay  on  the  death  of  Eggleston's  father, 
and  here  in  his  tenth  year  the  boy  began  his 
school  life  in  the  little  school-house  which  has 
become  so  familiar  to  his  readers.  The  scenes 
and  incidents  of  this  experience  are  retold  in 
that  charming  volume,  A  Hoosier  School 
Boy,  with  so  loving  and  faithful  a  touch  that 
no  one  can  doubt  that  they  are  the  personal 
memories  of  the  chronicler.  The  ambitions  of 
these  boys,  whose  greatest  desire  was  to  have 
an  education,  their  hopes  and  disappointments, 
their  misunderstandings  with  their  teacher,  and 
their  manly  apologies,  their  schoolboy  games 
and  plays,  are  all  a  part  of  Eggleston's  own  ex- 
perience. The  school-house  is  a  memory,  not 
a  creation,  and  into  it  really  walked  one  day 


EDWARD    EGGLESTON  35 

the  veritable  little  Christopher  Columbus,  with 
his  tiny  voice  and  thin  legs,  to  shame  all  the 
big  boys  by  reading  better  than  they.  Little 
Christopher  Columbus  did  not  know  that  his 
biographer  sat  watching  him  with  admiring 
eyes,  and  no  one  dreamed  that  this  episode  was 
afterward  to  be  incorporated  into  that  charm- 
ing book.  Eggleston's  boyhood,  like  that  of 
Ho  wells,  was  full  of  the  energetic  influence 
of  the  young  West,  an  influence  which,  after 
building  homes  in  the  wilderness  and  bringing 
civilization  to  take  the  place  of  savage  condi- 
tions, kept  bravely  to  its  work  of  developing 
the  frontier. 

The  youth  of  that  period  received  only  those 
things  for  which  he  strived.  Education,  the 
boon  more  desired  than  anything  else,  was 
hard  to  obtain.  The  country  schools  were 
either  taught  by  old  fogies,  who  ruled  with 
birch  and  rattan,  or  by  young  men,  to  whom 
teaching  meant  only  a  means  to  livelihood 
while  preparing  for  some  other  work.  Here 
and  there  throughout  the  country  were  scat- 
tered   a    few    academies    where    the    higher 


2,6  EDWARD   EGGLESTON 

branches  were  taught,  but  only  a  few  boys  had 
the  means  to  avail  themselves  of  the  privilege. 
The  boy  of  the  Ohio  Valley  fifty  years  ago 
knew  very  early  that  his  own  will  and  strength 
must  win  for  him  in  the  battle  of  life  ;  and 
this  knowledge  brought  into  play  the  best 
forces  of  his  nature.  Underneath  the  care- 
lessness of  boyhood  generally  lurked  an  earn- 
est desire  to  become  useful  to  his  generation, 
and  to  this  ambition  Eggleston  was  no  excep- 
tion. 

Life  meant  much  to  him  early,  and  at  nine 
years  old  the  village  school  at  Vevay  knew  no 
better  pupil  than  the  delicate  boy  who  had 
already  begun  to  learn  that  the  patient  endur- 
ance of  ill-health  must  be  one  of  his  greatest 
teachers.  A  few  weeks  at  school  would  be 
followed  by  many  months  of  sickness,  but  his 
purpose  never  faltered.  During  one  of  these 
periods  of  ill-health  he  was  sent  to  stay  for 
some  months  in  a  backwoods  district,  where 
life  was  still  in  the  rudest  stage.  Shut  off 
from  books,  Eggleston  gathered  from  this  ex- 
perience  stores   of   valuable  knowledge.     Al- 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  37 

though  only  twelve  years  old,  he  was  a  student 
of  human  nature,  and  the  unfamiliar  scenes  be- 
came picture-stories  of  the  lives  of  the  rough 
men  by  whom  he  was  surrounded.  Many 
years  after  he  reproduced  the  memories  of  these 
days  with  a  faithfulness  which  showed  how 
vividly  they  had  impressed  him.  There  is,  in- 
deed, in  all  his  work  the  same  charm  that  is 
found  in  the  poetry  of  Whittier,  and  which 
makes  so  much  of  it  seem  like  a  translation  of 
the  moods  and  feelings  of  boyhood. 

Besides  studying,  Eggleston  was  always  busy 
writing.  He  was  still  a  young  boy  when  his 
first  contribution  appeared.  A  country  news- 
paper had  offered  a  prize  for  the  best  composi- 
tion by  a  schoolboy  under  fifteen,  and  he  re- 
solved to  obtain  it  if  possible.  He  was  not  at 
that  time  in  school,  but  was  acting  as  clerk  for 
a  hardware  merchant.  The  editor,  however,  as- 
sured him  that  this  would  not  debar  him  from 
the  competition.  Thereafter  every  spare  mo- 
ment was  given  to  the  composition  of  an 
essay  on  the  given  subject,  and  to  Eggleston's 
great  joy  he  won  the  prize,  although  his  em- 


38  EDWARD    EGGLESTON 

ployer  had  from  that  day  suspicions  as  to  the 
real  value  of  a  clerk  with  a  literary  turn  of 
mind. 

Not  very  long  after,  being  again  at  school, 
he  won  high  praise  from  his  teacher  for  a  lit- 
tle essay  on  The  Will,  which,  although  full  of 
imitations  of  the  writers  he  had  been  studying, 
still  showed  much  promise.  At  that  time  there 
were  no  railroads  connecting  the  East  and 
the  West,  and  the  newspapers  and  books  from 
the  Atlantic  coast  were  a  long  time  in  reach- 
ing the  frontier.  There  grew  up,  therefore, 
in  the  Ohio  Valley  a  little  coterie  of  native 
writers,  who  represented  the  best  thought  and 
culture  of  the  region.  Their  poetry,  fiction, 
and  essays  were  gladly  welcomed  by  the  West- 
ern newspapers,  which  often  devoted  pages  to 
this  literature,  and  the  writers  thus  gained 
much  local  fame.  The  teacher  who  so  kindly 
encouraged  young  Eggleston  was  one  of  the 
best  known  of  these  Western  writers.  Al- 
though she  found  fault  with  every  other  sen- 
tence of  the  little  essay  on  The  Will,  she  still 
saw  its  merits,  and  to  Eggleston,  who  had  ad- 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  39 

mired  her  fame  for  years,  her  praise  was  very 
sweet.  It  was  a  great  inspiration  to  him  at 
the  moment,  and  the  faithful  criticism  which 
she  continued  to  give  was  of  inestimable  value 
to  the  future  novelist. 

When  he  was  seventeen  Eggleston  went  to 
Virginia  to  visit  his  father's  relatives.  Here 
he  had  a  year's  experience  of  Southern  planta- 
tion life.  This  easy,  luxurious  existence  was  a 
great  contrast  to  life  in  the  Ohio  Valley,  but, 
although  Eggleston  appreciated  it,  his  instincts 
remained  true  to  the  wider  freedom  of  the 
country  of  his  birth.  He  was  destined  to  be 
the  chronicler  of  the  true  story  of  much  of  that 
Western  life,  and  nothing  could  ever  detract 
from  its  vital  and  enduring  charm.  One  of 
his  Virginia  uncles,  who  was  rich  and  child- 
less, wished  to  adopt  him,  but  Eggleston  re- 
fused, and  returned  home  richer  for  the  ex- 
perience and  for  the  few  months'  training 
from  an  excellent  Virginia  school,  but  still 
devoted  heart  and  soul  to  the  interests  of  the 
West. 

A  year  later  he  was  sent  to  Minnesota,  in  the 


40  EDWARD   EGGLESTON 

hope  that  the  cHmate  might  benefit  his  health, 
which  seemed  completely  broken.  He  was 
threatened  with  consumption,  and  knowing 
that  he  had  but  this  chance  for  life,  he  threw 
himself  desperately  into  the  rough  frontier 
work,  which  kept  him  out  of  doors  continu- 
ally. He  drove  oxen  to  break  up  new  ground, 
wading  through  the  wet  prairie  grass  at  day- 
break, and  broiling  under  the  noonday  sun. 
He  felled  trees,  rolled  logs,  and  acted  as 
chain-bearer  for  a  party  of  surveyors.  He 
fought  a  troublesome  cough  and  fever  with  the 
same  determination,  and  in  a  few  months  his 
youth  and  pluck  had  turned  the  scale,  and  he 
was  on  the  road  to  health.  He  nov/  set  out 
to  walk  from  Minnesota  to  Kansas,  and  it  is 
a  pity  that  he  kept  no  journal  of  this  expe- 
rience. 

A  delicate  boy  travelling  through  the  West- 
ern frontier  for  over  two  hundred  miles, 
he  must  have  met  with  many  unique  advent- 
ures. He  slept  at  night  in  hunters'  cabins, 
rough  country  taverns,  little  log -houses  of 
settlers,  and  sometimes  out  of  doors  under  the 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  41 

shelter  of  friendly  logs  and  ties.  He  lived  on 
the  rude  fare  that  supplied  the  wants  of  the 
hardy  backwoodsmen,  and  his  companions 
were  oftenest  thos:^  r^ugh  spirits  who  found  in 
the  excitement  of  frontier  life  a  congenial  at- 
mosphere. But  the  journey  was  accomplished, 
though  on  reaching  Kansas  he  was  not  al- 
lowed to  enter  its  borders  because  of  the  un- 
settled state  that  society  had  been  thrown  into 
by  the  political  troubles.  Turning  eastward, 
Eggleston  resolved  to  travel  home  on  foot. 
When  near  the  end  of  his  journey  his  money 
and  strength  both  nearly  gave  out,  and  he  was 
indebted  to  two  friendly  strangers  for  the  two 
dollars  necessary  to  reach  home.  He  arrived 
at  the  house  of  his  nearest  relatives  in  such  a 
tattered  condition  that  the  maid  almost  refused 
him  entrance,  and  his  half-brother  was  for 
some  moments  in  doubt  about  allowing  the 
relationship.  This  experience  ended  Eggle= 
ston's  boyhood.  The  next  year,  being  not  yet 
nineteen,  he  put  into  execution  a  long-cher- 
ished plan.  Knowing  that  his  health  would 
never  allow  him  to  enter  college,  he  put  that 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON 


wish  aside,  and  filled  with  a  desire  to  make 
of  life  a  noble  achievement,  he  became  that 
ideal  of  the  young  West,  a  circuit-rider. 

In  entering  the  ministry  Eggleston  was  ful- 
filhng  the  hope  of  his  life.  To  one  of  his  edu- 
cation and  training  the  Methodist  minister 
of  the  day  represented  the  ideal  of  self-sacri- 
fice and  spiritual  aspiration  ;  he  was  a  soldier 
of  Christ,  ready  to  fight,  conquer  or  die,  in 
his  Master's  service,  and  to  him  the  warfare 
seemed  glorious.  Eggleston  took  up  his  new 
duties  as  the  youth  of  old  assumed  the  honors 
of  knighthood.  It  was  a  solemn  dedication  of 
his  young  life  to  the  service  of  humanity  and 
the  acceptance  of  a  trust  which  he  faithful- 
ly fulfilled.  The  Methodism  inherited  and 
shared  by  the  generations  to  which  Eggleston 
belonged  did  for  the  West  what  Puritanism 
accomplished  for  New  England — it  made  the 
every-day  life  an  impulse  toward  right-doing, 
and  in  this  it  laid  strong  and  deep  the  founda- 
tions of  noble  character  and  loyal  citizenship. 
The  republic  owes  much  to  this  valiant  army 
of  workers  which  Eggleston  now  joined,  burn- 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  43 

ing  with  a  desire  to  devote  his  whole  feeble 
strength  to  the  common  cause. 

We  can  picture  him  thus,  a  delicate  boy, 
riding  from  place  to  place,  be  the  weather  what 
it  might,  finding  his  home  among  the  mem- 
bers of  his  scattered  flock,  suffering  discomfort 
and  often  danger,  anxious,  yet  fearing  nothing 
but  that  he  might  fail  in  his  duty. 

His  first  charge  included  a  circuit  of  ten 
places,  which  he  visited  at  intervals.  He  car- 
ried his  wardrobe  in  his  saddle-bags,  and  as 
he  never  for  one  moment  gave  up  his  deter- 
mination to  become  a  scholar,  nearly  all  the 
time  he  spent  on  horseback  was  passed  in  read- 
ing and  study. 

Much  of  Eggleston's  experience  as  an  itin- 
erant Methodist  minister  is  reproduced  in  The 
Circuit  Rider.  The  Ohio  Valley  in  Eggle- 
ston's youth  was  the  border-land  of  town  and 
village  life,  all  the  great  country  westw^ard 
being  occupied  only  by  Indians  or  by  rough 
settlements  of  hunters,  traders,  and  miners. 
This  place  between,  where  the  civilization  of 
the  East  met  the  wild  life  of  the  West,  was  the 


44  EDWARD    EGGLESTON 

scene  of  The  Circuit  Ridei%  into  whose  pages 
are  wrought  many  striking  incidents  of  those 
successful  times.  The  heroes  of  the  book  are 
two  youths,  Kike  and  Morton,  sons  of  valley 
farmers.  Both  are  turned  from  their  wild 
lives  through  the  influence  of  one  of  those 
Methodist  ministers  so  familiar  to  their  times, 
and  both  renounce  all  worldly  ambitions  to 
enter  upon  the  life  of  the  circuit-rider.  The 
story  is  touchingly  in  sympathy  with  the  ex- 
perience of  the  humble  country  folk  who 
figure  in  its  pages.  Their  home  life  and  their 
spiritual  struggles  alike  appeal  to  our  interest ; 
we  are  present  at  their  merry  corn-huskings 
and  apple-paring  bees,  at  their  prayer-meetings, 
and  camp-meetings.  Each  scene  has  the  value 
of  local  history,  and  nowhere  in  American 
literature  is  there  a  more  soul-stirring  picture 
than  that  which  traces  Kike  awakening  to  the 
high  conception  of  a  life  of  self-sacrifice. 

Eggleston's  own  experience  as  a  circuit-rider 
came  to  an  end  after  six  months,  as  his  health 
broke  down  completely  under  the  strain,  and 
he  was  obliged  to  return  to  Minnesota.     The 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  45 

invigorating  air  and  freedom  from  care  again 
worked  their  charm,  and  in  a  short  time  he 
was  once  more  engaged  in  preaching.  His 
work  now  was  on  the  Minnesota  frontier, 
where  the  Indians  still  lingered,  forming  a 
large  part  of  the  population.  The  white  set- 
tlements and  Indian  villages  all  along  the 
Minnesota  River  soon  became  familiar  with 
the  face  of  the  young  preacher,  who  walked 
from  place  to  place  shod  in  moccasins,  and 
who  brought  into  their  rough  lives  the  only 
refining  and  uplifting  influence  that  they  knew. 
We  can  see  the  groups  gathered  round  him 
while  he  gives  his  word  of  advice  or  encour- 
agement, the  scene  recalling  an  episode  in  the 
career  of  Eliot,  and  reflecting  a  phase  of  Amer- 
ican life  that  has  forever  passed  away. 

But  Eggleston's  fame  as  a  preacher  soon 
made  him  in  demand  in  the  larger  towns,  and 
less  than  two  years  after  he  entered  the  min- 
istry he  accepted  a  call  to  the  city  of  St.  Paul. 
From  this  time  his  Hfe  was  spent  almost  en- 
tirely in  cities.  Owing  to  his  poor  health  he 
was  often  obliged  to  give  up  his  duties  as  a 


46  EDWARD   EGGLESTON 

minister  and  take  up  whatever  work  presented 
itself  as  a  means  of  support  for  his  family. 
He  had  in  the  meantime  begun  to  write  regu- 
larly for  various  religious  papers,  and  had  suc- 
cessfully accomplished  some  editorial  work. 

In  1870,  when  Eggleston  was  in  his  thirty- 
fourth  year,  he  accepted  a  position  on  The  In- 
depeiident,  and  left  the  West  for  his  new  home 
in  Brooklyn.  Although  later  years  were  again 
devoted  to  preaching,  this  was  the  beginning 
of  an  uninterrupted  literary  life,  which  has  con- 
tinued to  the  present  day. 

His  first  important  book,  and  the  one  which 
brought  him  instant  recognition,  was  The 
Hoosier  Schoolmaster,  which  was  written  as 
a  serial  for  the  periodical  Hearth  and  Home. 
Almost  immediately  after  its  publication  in 
book  form  it  was  issued  in  England,  France, 
Germany,  and  Denmark,  and  everywhere  it 
was  received  with  the  greatest  favor.  With 
true  artistic  instinct,  Eggleston  had  gone  for 
the  material  of  his  book  to»  the  old  familiar 
life  of  his  youth.  The  scenes  which  lingered 
in  his  memory  when  touched  by  his  trained 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  4/ 

hand  became  vivid  pictures  of  new  and  peculiar 
interest.  This  revelation  of  the  picturesque- 
ness  of  Western  frontier  life  appealed  to  all, 
and  the  vital  humanity  which  throbbed  through 
its  pages  touched  every  heart. 

This  book  which  made  Eggleston  a  novelist 
showed  him,  also,  the  probable  place  for  his 
own  contributions  to  American  literature.  He 
became  the  novelist  of  the  river  frontier  and 
prairie  life,  which  so  fortunately  for  our  liter- 
ature lingered  long  enough  to  make  its  lasting 
impression  upon  his  youth.  The  titles  of  his 
successive  books  show  this  life  in  many  as- 
pects. From  the  ideal  reproductions  of  The 
Hoosier  Schoolmaster,  and  The  Hoosier  School- 
boy, in  which  we  walk  hand  in  hand  with  child- 
hood, through  all  the  graver  problems  of  adult 
life  we  still  follow  the  fortunes  of  the  class 
that  Eggleston's  art  has  made  typical. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  of  his  books  is 
The  Graysons,  the  story  of  a  young  law-stu- 
dent who  is  accused  of  murder,  and  whose 
acquittal  is  obtained  by  Abraham  Lincoln  who 
pleads   his  cause.     This  introduction   of   Lin- 


48  EDWARD   EGGLESTON 

coin  into  fiction  was  made  by  request,  and  the 
incident  is  cleverly  made  to  illustrate  the  keen- 
ness and  sagacity  of  the  great  statesman  even 
while  an  obscure  lawyer  in  an  obscurer  Western 
town. 

Among  Eggleston's  juvenile  w^orks  The 
ScJioolniaster  s  Stories  fo?^  Boys  and  Girls, 
Queer  Stories  for  Boys  and  Girls,  A  First 
Book  i7i  A^nerican  History,  and  a  large 
amount  of  miscellaneous  matter  all  indicate  his 
sympathy  with  the  heart  of  childhood,  and  his 
ability  to  enter  into  the  questions  and  interests 
w^hich  make  up  the  child-world.  They  are 
genuine  boys  and  girls  who  walk  through  his 
pages.  Perhaps  the  book  which  shows  Eggle- 
ston  at  his  best  is  The  Circ2tit  Rider,  with 
its  fine  insight  into  those  spiritual  problems 
which  interest  all  humanity.  Roxy  is  another 
delineation  of  character,  which,  in  its  story  of 
the  struggle  between  right  and  wrong  in  the 
human  heart,  suggests  the  old  Puritanism  of 
New  England. 

Besides  his  novels  Eggleston  has  accom- 
plished a  great  deal  of  work  on  historical  sub- 


EDWARD   EGGLESTON  49 

jects,  which  has  appeared  in  various  magazines 
and  periodicals,  and  he  has  in  preparation  a 
history  of  the  United  States  to  which  he  has 
already  devoted  much  time  in  research  in  the 
great  libraries  of  the  world.  Some  school  his- 
tories and  a  good  portion  of  miscellaneous 
matter  must  also  be  included  in  his  work. 
His  distinctive  contribution  to  American  liter- 
ature is  his  reproduction  of  a  phase  of  Ameri- 
can life  which  has  now  passed  away,  but  which 
has  a  unique  value  for  the  student  of  history. 

The  latter  years  of  Eggleston's  life  have 
been  spent  mostly  in  New  York,  where  he 
now  lives. 


CHAPTER   IV 

CHARLES    DUDLEY    WARNER 
1829  — 

Charles  Dudley  Warner  was  born  in  Plain- 
field,  Mass.,  in  that  lovely  and  picturesque  re- 
gion which  has  become  celebrated  in  Ameri- 
can literature  as  the  birthplace  of  William  Cul- 
len  Bryant.  The  country  has  scarcely  changed 
since  those  early  days  when  the  boy  Bryant 
used  to  wander  over  its  fields  and  hills  and 
hear  in  the  neighboring  forests  the  cries  of  the 
wolves  and  bears  which  made  their  home  there. 
The  Warner  family  belonged  to  the  farmer 
race,  which  at  that  time  made  up  the  larger 
part  of  New  England  life.  The  father  was  a 
man  of  fine  tastes,  having  a  good  library  and 
being  in  frequent  correspondence  with  people 
in  various  parts  of  the  country  who  were  in- 
terested  in   the  public   questions  of   the  day. 


CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER         5 1 

But  while  Charles  was  still  a  very  young  child 
his  father  died,  and  the  family  was  broken  up 
for  some  years.  The  boy  was  taken  to  the 
home  of  an  aunt,  who  owned  a  homestead  on 
the  Deerfield  River,  and  it  is  here  that  his  first 
recollections  centre.  The  lad's  first  school  was 
in  one  of  those  little  school-houses  which  have 
been  described  in  the  verses  of  Whittier  and 
Bryant,  and  his  life  may  in  every  respect  be 
said  to  have  corresponded  to  that  so  lovingly 
portrayed  in  "  The  Barefoot  Boy."  This  life 
makes  a  boy  healthful  and  manly,  and  the  close 
communion  with  nature  fosters  those  poetic 
impressions  to  which  the  young  mind  is  so  sus- 
ceptible. Warner  was  happy  in  the  care  of  his 
aunt  and  an  older  cousin,  but  there  was  one 
great  drawback  to  this  otherwise  contented 
life.  At  the  Deerfield  farm-house  there  were 
no  books  except  the  Bible  and  one  or  two  re- 
ligious works,  and  to  a  book-loving  boy  this 
was  a  great  deprivation.  The  family  held  to 
the  strict  observance  of  the  New  England  Sab- 
bath, which  extended  from  six  o'clock  on  Sat- 
urday evening  to  six  o'clock  on  Sunday  even- 


52         CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER 

ing,  and  though  much  of  this  time  was  occu- 
pied with  church-going,  there  were  many  hours 
in  which  a  book  would  have  been  a  boon. 
The  imaginative  child,  however,  has  always  a 
little  kingdom  of  his  own  to  which  he  may  re- 
treat when  disappointed  with  the  actual  world, 
and  in  this  fairy  realm  Warner  spent  many 
a  happy  hour  planning  and  dreaming  of  the 
future.  He  was  but  repeating  the  experience 
of  so  many  other  New  England  boys  in  whose 
early  days  seems  to  have  lain  the  best  training 
for  the  intellectual  life. 

But  a  lack  of  reading  does  not  make  a  boy 
poor  when  he  has  at  command  the  fruits  of 
meadow,  field,  and  wood ;  when  trout-streams 
exist  for  him  alone ;  when  sunny  days  and  rainy 
weather  alike  have  their  special  joys,  and  when 
nature  is  forever  watching  a  chance  to  teach 
him  lessons  of  truth  and  beauty.  The  atmos- 
phere of  this  quiet,  uneventful  life  was  an  in- 
fluence for  good — an  influence  which  Warner 
afterward  gratefully  appreciated. 

Many  a  boy  whose  actual  life  has  been 
bounded  by  the  narrow  confines  of  farm  life 


CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER         53 

has  had  his  first  glimpse  of  the  world  beyond 
through  the  pages  of  a  book.  In  Warner's 
case  this  book  was  the  Arabian  Nights,  which 
his  seat-mate  brought  to  the  little  school-house 
one  day  and  hid  amid  the  other  boyish  treas- 
ures in  his  desk.  A  district  school-teacher  can- 
not see  all  that  happens  in  his  restless  king- 
dom, and  the  urchin  had  more  than  one  stolen 
glance  into  the  wonderful  book  while  he  was 
supposed  to  be  studying  his  spelling  or  doing 
sums.  And  what  an  ideal  world  this  was 
which  the  young  discoverer  had  thus  sailed 
into !  Here  were  genii,  fairies,  enchanted  car- 
pets, valleys  of  diamonds,  and  masquerading 
pedlers  who  gave  ''old  lamps  for  new."  In 
this  realm,  which  the  geographies  so  ignorantly 
omitted  to  mention,  farm  work  and  even  farm 
pleasures  had  no  place.  All  was  glittering, 
dazzling,  beautiful  !  Every  day  held  new  ad- 
ventures, and  one's  intimate  friends  owned 
miles  of  treasure  -  houses  and  inexhaustible 
mines  of  wealth.  When  school  was  done  War- 
ner succeeded  in  borrowing  this  treasure,  and 
hurrying   home,   announced   to  his   aunt    and 


54         CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER 

cousin  that  he  had  found  '*  the  most  splendid 
book  in  the  world."  Imagine  his  surprise  and 
disgust  when  these  relatives,  after  an  inspection 
of  the  precious  volume,  said,  gravely  :  *'  No, 
you  cannot  read  this,  Charles,  it  is  not  true." 

But  the  boy  evidently  thinking  that  in  such 
cases  aunts  and  cousins  were  as  fallible  as 
primary  geographies,  carried  the  book  to  the 
barn  and  hid  it  in  the  hay,  and  there  spent 
many  an  hour  devouring  the  enchanting  tales. 

Another  book  which  he  began  at  this  time 
was  Cook's  Voyages  Around  the  Woidd,  the 
second  volume  of  which  had  drifted  somehow 
up  to  the  old  farm-house  door.  These  two 
books  with  the  Bible  were  absolutely  all  that 
Warner  knew  of  the  vast  treasures  of  literature 
while  he  remained  at  the  Deerfield  River  farm. 

But  life  broadened  into  wider  channels  when 
in  his  twelfth  year  he  was  taken  by  his  mother 
to  Cazenovia,  N.  Y.,  and  placed  in  the  acad- 
emy there.  The  life  at  Deerfield  had  been 
that  of  the  river,  and  fields,  and  woods,  but  at 
Cazenovia  Warner  became  emphatically  the 
studious  boy,  to  whom  books  and  study  meant 


CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER         55 

more  than  anything  else  in  the  world.  At  the 
academy  he  was  fortunate  in  his  boy  ac- 
quaintances, and  there  he  made  friendships 
which  have  lasted  through  his  life.  One  of 
his  friends  was  the  son  of  a  bookseller,  in 
whose  shop  Warner  was  allowed  to  browse  at 
will.  And  here  he  learned  to  know  Irving 
and  Cooper,  Hawthorne,  Prescott,  and  Bry- 
ant, and  the  other  writers  who  were  found- 
ing American  literature.  This  education 
which  went  on  outside  the  academy  was  also 
greatly  stimulated  by  the  talks  and  discussions 
on  literary  matters  between  him  and  his  com- 
rades. And  by  and  by,  as  always  happens  in 
the  case  of  boys  who  read  and  read,  they  all 
began  to  write.  Their  first  efforts  took  the 
form  of  poetry,  which  somehow  always  seems 
to  the  boyish  mind  the  easiest  thing  to  wTite, 
and  thenceforth  much  of  their  interest  in  life 
lay  in  listening  to  and  criticising  one  another's 
verses.  One  of  these  boys  while  still  a  youth 
wrote  that  celebrated  song  of  how 

In  their  ragged  regimentals 
The  old  Continentals 


56         CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER 

rallied  to  the  defence  of  American  liberty  in 
the  stormy  days  of  the  Revolution. 

Another  has  since  become  a  famous  scholar 
in  literature  and  the  arts,  whose  name  is  known 
to  two  continents.  Warner  himself,  who  soon 
forsook  poetry  for  prose,  can  date  his  literary 
career  from  these  days  when  his  chief  ambition 
was  to  write  and  to  write  well.  It  was  his 
habit  then  and  long  afterward  to  walk  up  and 
down  his  room  while  writing  and  repeat  the 
sentences  over  and  over,  changing  and  polish- 
ing them  until  they  sounded  rhythmic.  The 
study  of  the  best  poetry  of  America  and 
England  still  went  on  steadily,  and  the  boys 
often  played  a  guessing  game  as  to  author 
and  verse.  Sometimes  the  giver  of  the  verse 
would  slip  in  a  couplet  of  his  own,  and  then 
laugh  at  the  wild  guesses  which  placed  his  ef- 
fusions among  the  English  classics. 

One  of  the  most  luminous  memories  of 
Warners  youth  is  that  of  a  visit  to  Irving  at 
Sunnyside,  whither  he  went  under  the  guid- 
ance of  one  of  these  early  friends.  The  fa- 
mous author  received  his  young  admirers  kindly 


CHARLES   DUDLEY   WARNER  57 

and  gave  to  Warner  an  ivy-leaf  from  the  vine 
which  had  grown  from  a  slip  plucked  from  the 
cottage  of  Burns's  ''  Bonnie  Jean."  Neither 
giver  nor  receiver  foresaw,  then,  the  link  that 
was  to  be  established  later  by  Warner's  biog- 
raphy of  America's  first  great  man  of  letters. 

In  185 1  Warner  was  graduated  from  Hamil- 
ton College,  which  he  entered  from  Cazenovia 
Academy,  taking  the  first  prize  for  English. 
He  had  already  become  somewhat  known  to 
the  literary  w^orld  through  contributions  to  the 
Knickerbocker  and  Piclnams  Magazine  and 
from  occasional  visits  to  New  York,  when  he 
became  for  a  time  a  member  of  that  Bohemian 
world  in  which  the  younger  generation  of 
writers  lived. 

But  although  he  had  made  a  good  begin- 
ning, literature  was  exchanged  two  years  after 
his  graduation  for  the  wild  life  of  the  Mexican 
frontier,  whither  he  went  with  a  surveying 
party  in  1853.  After  this  experience  he  stud- 
ied law  and  practised  it  in  Chicago  for  a  few 
years.  But  in  1866  he  returned  to  his  first 
ambition,  and  became  editor  of  the  Hartford 


58         CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER 

Press,  which  a  year  later  w^as  incorporated  with 
the  Couraiit.  Warner  made  of  this  newspaper 
one  of  the  best-edited  journals  of  its  class,  and 
in  its  conduct  won  an  enviable  reputation  as 
an  editor. 

A  year  or  two  later  he  took  his  first  journey 
to  Europe,  and  on  his  return  contributed  those 
papers  to  the  Conraiit  which  in  1870  made 
their  appearance  in  book-form  under  the  title 
My  Summer  in  a  Garden,  It  is  in  this  little 
volume  that  Warner  struck  that  vein  of  humor 
which  makes  his  work  a  delight  to  his  large 
audience. 

Another  book  which  added  greatly  to  his 
reputation  at  this  time  is  that  called  Saunter- 
ings,  which  contains  his  impressions  of  Europe 
in  this  first  journey.  Very  much  of  Warner's 
work  has  for  its  background  his  journeyings  in 
Europe  and  at  home.  His  Winter  on  the 
Nile,  hi  the  Levmit,  and  Notes  of  a  Rounda- 
bout Journey  in  Eiirope  are  among  his  most 
delightful  reminiscences  of  foreign  travel, 
while  Studies  in  the  South,  Studies  in  the 
Great    West,   and   Oztr  Italy,  show  his  wide 


CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER         59 

familiarity  with  the  scenes  of  his  native  land. 
He  is  a  sympathetic,  cultivated  traveller,  by 
whom  new  impressions  of  art  and  social  life 
are  appreciated,  but  who,  nevertheless,  sees  all 
things  through  that  half-humorous  light  which 
delights  American  readers.  He  is  never  too 
learned  to  extract  fun  out  of  a  pyramid  or  cliff 
dwelling,  and,  though  an  ardent  patriot,  he  has 
no  hesitation  in  laughing  at  the  foibles  and 
eccentricities  of  his  countrymen.  His  charac- 
terizations of  foreign  and  home  life  possess  all 
the  flavor  and  freshness  of  the  mind  which 
looks  at  life  from  a  new  point  of  view.  He  is 
the  author  of  some  charming  essays,  printed 
as  Back  Log  Studies  and  As  We  Were  Saying, 
and  he  has  published  several  successful  novels. 
If  he  is  not  a  creator  in  the  realm  of  art,  he  is 
a  keen  observer  and  man  of  the  world,  deeply 
interested  in  his  fellow-travellers.  His  records 
of  his  impressions,  although  thrown  into  the 
form  of  novels,  are  valuable  chiefly  for  their 
sympathetic  view  of  every-day  life. 

One  of   our  author's  most  charming  books 
is  that  reminiscence  of  his  childhood,  Beiftg  a 


6o         CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER 

Boy.  Here  we  have  the  actual  life  of  the  New 
England  boy  sixty  years  ago.  All  the  little 
humble  incidents  of  farm  life,  all  the  simple 
pleasures,  the  delights  of  fishing  and  nutting, 
of  maple-sugar  gathering,  and  the  first  party 
are  noted  with  a  sincerity  that  makes  the  little 
narrative  genuine  history.  Whittier  read  this 
book  more  than  once,  and  said  it  was  a  page 
out  of  his  own  life-story.  Outside  its  literary 
merit  it  is  valuable  as  one  more  truthful  pict- 
ure of  the  simple  life  of  New  England ;  a  life 
whose  healthful  duties  and  pleasures  left  wide 
spaces  for  the  soul  to  grow  up  to  noble  con- 
ceptions of  manhood. 

Besides  his  other  work  Mr.  Warner  has 
contributed  a  department  to  Harper  s  Maga- 
zine, and  has  made  some  valuable  additions 
to  the  social  science  papers  of  the  day.  He 
has  also  served  on  the  commission  for  estab- 
lishing prison  reform,  and  he  is  well  known  as 
a  successful  lecturer.  Throughout  his  career 
he  has  followed  mainly  the  lines  laid  down  for 
himself  in  his  student  days,  and  has  bounded 
his  ambitions  by  the  literary  life.      Since  1867 


CHARLES  DUDLEY  WARNER 


his  home  has  been  at  Hartford.  One  of  our 
most  successful  humorists,  he  is  also  a  strik- 
ing example  of  those  earnest  toilers  whose 
work  well  supports  the  dignity  of  American 
literature. 


CHAPTER  V 

EDMUND   CLARENCE    STEDMAN 

1833— 

Out  of  the  many  New  England  country 
boys  who  dreamed  day-dreams  one  came  back 
in  manhood  to  his  early  home  and  confessed 
that  some  of  his  dreams  had  come  true.  This 
was  not  strange,  for  it  is  generally  the  youth- 
ful day-dreamer  whose  after-life  is  fullest  of 
accomplishment.  Nature,  who  is  so  wise  a 
teacher,  sends  in  these  dreams  such  a  vision  of 
the  future  that  the  soul  is  even  then  eager  to 
press  forward  to  its  realization.  Sometimes 
this  vision  is  obscured  later  by  ambitions  that 
are  ignoble ;  in  such  cases  it  fades  away  and  is 
lost,  like  youth  itself.  But  the  larger  number 
of  those  who  do  the  world's  noblest  work  is 
made  up  of  men  and  women  who  received  in 
childhood  some  such  revelation  of  the  meaning 
of  life.     If  with  the  day-dream  comes  a  sense 


EDMUND    CLARENCE   STEDMAN  63 

of  the  beauty  of  nature — of  the  melodies  which 
thrill  through  the  songs  of  brook,  and  bird, 
and  forest  aisle — and  a  desire  to  reproduce 
them,  the  boy  is  apt  to  become  a  poet.  Such 
a  boy  was  Edmund  Clarence  Stedman,  born 
at  Hartford,  Ct,  in  1833,  being  the  son  of  a 
merchant  in  comfortable  circumstances. 

When  he  was  two  years  old  Stedman  was 
taken  to  Norwich  to  live  with  a  great-uncle, 
and  it  was  with  this  pretty  village,  with  its  elm- 
shaded  streets  and  old  colonial  mansions,  and 
with  its  outlying  fields  and  pasture  lands,  that 
his  earliest  associations  are  connected.  In  his 
poem.  The  Freshet,  there  are  many  touches 
which  recall  his  boyhood,  and  which  are  in 
a  sense  biographical.  The  pictures  of  the 
group  of  boys  standing  on  the  bridge  or  wad- 
ing through  the  alder  thickets  to  the  deep 
channel,  where  they  fished  and  swam,  and  of 
the  spring  freshet  when  the  river  rolled  on  like 
a  flood,  carrying  cakes  of  ice,  lumber,  rails, 
hay,  and  cattle  along,  are  both  scenes  from 
the  actual  experiences  of  the  poet's  youth. 
Throughout   all   his   work  one  hears,  indeed, 


64  EDMUND    CLARENCE   STEDMAN 

an  ever-recurrent  note  that  tells  of  early  days ; 
sometimes  the  note  is  sad  and  sometimes  gay, 
but  always  it  is  touched  with  that  regret  which 
clings  to  the  past. 

The  uncle  with  whom  Stedman  passed  his 
youth  was  an  eminent  lawyer  and  a  man  of 
learning.  Very  careful  attention  was  paid  to 
the  boy's  education,  as  well  as  to  the  home 
life,  which  was  carried  on  after  the  strictest 
New  England  fashion.  But  Stedman,  like 
other  New  England  boys,  was  all  the  better 
for  this  discipline.  It  developed  strength  and 
endurance  of  character,  a  manliness  of  temper, 
and  an  indifference  to  the  minor  ills  of  life, 
and  this  is  invaluable  training  for  any  poet. 
Stedman  entered  Yale  at  sixteen,  and  immedi- 
ately became  known  as  one  of  its  cleverest 
freshmen,  though  he  rebelled  often  at  the  dis- 
cipline. He  was  a  brilliant  member  of  the  col- 
lege literary  circle  and  a  contributor  to  the  Yale 
Literary  Magazine,  which  bestowed  a  prize 
upon  him  for  a  poem  on  Westminster  Abbey. 

But  his  record  as  a  scholar  did  not  blind  the 
college    authorities   to   his   faults,   and    in    his 


EDMUND    CLARENCE   STEDMAN  65 

junior  year  the  faculty  suspended  him  for 
some  boyish  escapade,  and  he  never  returned. 
Twenty  years  afterward,  however,  when  Yale 
had  reason  to  be  proud  of  his  fame  as  a  man  of 
letters,  she  called  him  to  her  halls  and  con- 
ferred upon  him  his  degree  in  the  presence  of 
an  assemblage  called  together  to  see  him  thus 
honored  both  as  man  and  poet. 

The  immediate  result  of  his  leaving  college 
was  a  determination  to  begin  life  for  himself, 
and  at  the  age  of  nineteen  he  became  editor  of 
the  Norwich  Tribu7ie,  The  new  venture  was 
at  once  successful.  Two  years  later  he  took 
charge  of  the  Winsted  Herald,  and  conducted 
it  so  successfully  that  it  speedily  acquired  the 
fame  of  being  one  of  the  cleverest  newspapers 
published  outside  the  great  cities.  But  grati- 
fying as  this  must  have  been,  the  young  editor 
sighed  for  new  fields,  and  in  1852  he  removed 
to  New  York  and  became  a  contributor  to 
Harper  s  and  PtUiianis  Magazines,  and  a 
short-lived  periodical  published  under  the  name 
of  Vaiiity  Fair.  Stedman  was  now  twenty- 
one  years  old.  He  had  married,  and  as  his 
5 


66  EDMUND   CLARENCE   STEDMAN 

magazine  work  could  not  support  him,  he 
returned  to  journalism.  His  first  important 
literary  success,  as  in  the  case  of  Lowell  and 
Holmes,  was  based  upon  the  publication  of  a 
political  poem. 

The  newspapers  had  just  given  to  the  world 
the  story  of  John  Brown's  capture  of  Harper's 
Ferry,  and  North  and  South  alike  were  bit- 
terly excited  over  the  event.  This  plain 
farmer  was  the  most  humble  of  the  anti-sla- 
very leaders,  yet  his  name  was  destined  to  be  the 
war-cry  of  the  North  for  four  years.  He  had, 
with  a  force  of  men,  marched  to  the  fortress 
of  Harper's  Ferry  with  the  avowed  purpose 
of  starting  a  military  crusade  against  slavery. 
The  garrison,  under  the  impression  that  a 
large  force  was  attacking,  surrendered  without 
a  struggle,  and  John  Brown  marched  in  and 
took  possession.  The  fort  was  retaken  in  a 
few  days,  but  the  event  produced  the  most  ex- 
traordinary agitation  all  over  the  country. 
Every  newspaper  published  an  account  of  it, 
and  it  was  feared  that  the  most  serious  results 
would  follow. 


EDMUND   CLARENCE   STEDMAN  6/ 

What  should  be  done  with  John  Brown  him- 
Sbif  became  a  burning  question,  the  South 
clamoring  for  his  death  and  the  North  de- 
manding his  acquittal.  While  his  fate  was  still 
under  discussion  there  appeared  in  the  New 
York  Tribu7ie  a  remarkable  poem,  in  which  all 
the  feeling  of  the  moment  seemed  crystallized. 
Stedman  was  the  author  of  this  poem,  and  no 
one  but  a  true  poet  could  so  have  entered  into 
the  spirit  of  the  old  hero,  to  whom  inaction 
seemed  a  denial  of  principle. 

"How  John  Brown  Took  Harper^s  Ferry" 
is  a  ballad  full  of  fire  and  force.  Stedman's 
power  is  shown  in  his  fine  appreciation  of  the 
unselfish  frenzy  which  possessed  the  old  man 
and  led  him  to  offer  himself  as  a  martyr  in  the 
cause  he  had  espoused.  One  of  the  most  stir- 
ring ballads  produced  by  the  war,  it  will  always 
iold  a  prominent  place  in  the  lyric  poetry  of 
Vmerica.  In  less  than  two  years  after  its  pub- 
iication  the  author  found  himself  war  corre- 
spondent of  the  Tribune,  following  the  fort- 
unes of  the  Army  of  the  Potomac  in  its  first 
campaign.     The  South  had   decided  that  the 


68  EDMUND    CLARENCE   STEDMAN 

question  of  slavery  must  be  settled  by  the 
sword,  and  the  country  was  in  the  midst  of 
civil  war. 

Another  poem  published  in  the  Tribune 
about  the  time  of  the  John  Brown  episode 
showed  the  versatile  talent  of  the  new  poet. 
This  was  "The  Diamond  Wedding,"  a  satire 
on  the  marriage  of  a  young  society  girl  to  a 
wealthy  Cuban  planter.  A  list  of  his  gifts  to 
his  promised  bride  appeared  in  the  daily  papers, 
and  sounded  like  a  catalogue  of  the  treasures 
of  Haroun-aLRashid.  Stedman's  poem  struck 
the  popular  fancy,  which  was  also  pleased  by 
the  publication  of  a  song  on  the  charms  of 
**  Lager  Bier."  Encouraged  by  this  friendly 
eulogy,  he  published  a  volume  of  poems  under 
the  title  Poems  Lyric  and  Idyllic.  It  is  in  this 
volume  that  **The  Freshet"  occurs,  and  also, 
among  several  other  good  examples,  the  poem 
"  Penelope,"  in  which  the  old  Greek  legend  is 
retold  in  beautiful  verse,  which  not  only  showed 
Stedman's  mastery  of  blank  verse,  but  also  his 
fine  scholarship. 

Stedman  followed  the  fortunes  of  the  army 


EDMUND    CLARENCE   STEDMAN  69 

throughout  the  war,  his  letters  to  his  journal 
forming  a  valuable  contribution  to  the  war  lit- 
erature of  the  day.  He  saw  the  first  famous 
Battle  of  Bull  Run,  when  the  Northern  army 
was  forced  to  retreat,  and  when  it  seemed  for 
the  time  that  the  war  would  be  carried  into 
the  North.  A  reminiscence  of  his  experience 
in  camp  and  hospital,  on  march  and  battle-field, 
is  found  in  his  long  poem,  "Alice  of  Mon- 
mouth." But,  although  this  poem  possesses 
passages  of  remarkable  beauty,  it  does  not  show 
Stedman  at  his  highest  reach.  This  is  attained 
in  those  shorter  lyrics,  which  are  so  sponta- 
neous, so  full  of  natural  poetry  and  so  perfect 
in  art  that  they  seem  to  spring  unconsciously 
from  the  soul.  One  cannot  help  regretting 
that  our  poet  has  not  given  us  a  more  generous 
measure  of  them.  One  of  the  most  perfect  of 
these  lyrics,  "The  Doorstep,"  is  full  of  that 
tender  regret  which  breathes  through  all  the 
poet's  work  a  treasured  memory  of  happy 
youth.  "Country  Sleighing"  is  another  song 
of  nature,  full  of  the  dash  and  breezy  story  of 
the  country  winter  season.     Again  in  "  Holy- 


70  EDMUND    CLARENCE   STEDMAN 

oke  Valley  "  the  poet  still  looks  backward  to 
his  boyhood,  and  gives,  through  the  music  of 
poetry,  one  more  bright  picture  of  the  past. 
Among  his  other  poems  may  be  mentioned 
the  ode  delivered  before  the  graduating  class 
of  Dartmouth  College  in  1873,  called  ''The 
Dartmouth  Ode,"  and  a  beautiful  and  touch- 
ing tribute  to  Horace  Greeley,  delivered  at 
the  request  of  the  Printers'  Association  at  the 
unveiling  of  the  bust  of  Greeley  in  Greenwood 
Cemetery.  Among  other  poems  of  occasions 
are  the  fine  lines,  ''  Gettysburg,"  delivered  at 
the  reunion  of  the  Army  of  the  Potomac  in 
1 87 1,  and  a  monody  on  the  death  of  Bryant, 
delivered  at  the  Century  Club,  New  York. 

Outside  his  poetry  Stedman  is  known  as  a 
most  conscientious  and  scholarly  editor  of  the 
work  of  other  writers  and  as  a  critic  of  origi- 
nal and  thoughtful  mind.  He  has  edited,  in 
conjunction  with  Thomas  Bailey  Aldrich,  a 
choice  selection  of  the  works  of  Landor,  and 
in  1875  he  began  the  publication  in  Scribners 
Magazine  of  a  series  of  critical  articles  on  the 
poets  and  poetry  of  the  Victorian  Age,  which 


EDMUND    CLARENCE   STEDMAN  /I 

forms  one  of  the  most  valuable  works  of  criti- 
cism in  our  later  literature.  Following  this 
came  a  volume  of  essays,  called  "  The  Poets  of 
America,"  and  one  entitled  "The  Nature  and 
Elements  of  Poetry  " — a  critical  and  imagina- 
tive study.  He  has  edited  also  The  Library 
of  Ame7Hcan  Literature,  and  an  anthology  of 
Victorian  poetry,  and  made  a  scholarly  trans- 
lation of  the  Greek  idyllic  poets.  In  all  his 
literary  productions  Stedman  shows  not  only 
his  fine  poetic  gift,  but  the  sound  literary 
judgment  and  attainments  of  the  scholar,  and 
his  work  forms  a  valuable  contribution  to  Am- 
erican letters. 

Stedman  has  passed  the  greater  part  of  his 
life  in  New  York,  whither  he  returned  soon 
after  the  war,  and  where  he  has  found  oppor- 
tunity not  only  to  write  books  but  to  be  a 
successful  business  man. 


CHAPTER  VI 

BRET    HARTE 
1839— 

One  of  the  favorite  stories  told  by  the  men 
who  had  conquered  Mexico  and  Peru  was 
that  of  a  region  of  fabulous  wealth,  situated 
somewhere  in  the  region  of  the  Sierra  Madre 
Mountains,  and  ruled  by  California,  a  white 
queen  of  divine  origin.  There,  it  was  said, 
were  hidden  mines  of  unexhaustible  treasures, 
where  emeralds,  diamonds,  and  rubies  were  as 
plentiful  as  gold  and  silver.  There,  also,  the 
rain  and  dew  watered  the  most  beautiful  val- 
leys in  the  world  ;  the  climate  was  beneficent, 
and  it  was  suspected  that  there  would  be  found 
that  magic  fountain  of  life,  for  which  the  brave 
De  Leon  had  sought  in  vain.  Many  bands 
of  adventurers,  bold  of  heart  and  full  of  hope, 
roamed   the   valleys   and    toiled    through   the 


BRET  HARTE  73 


mountain  passes  in  search  of  this  wealth,  but 
their  effort  was  unrewarded.  The  mountains 
kept  their  secret,  and  no  glimpse  of  diamond 
mine  or  wondrous  fountain  or  beautiful  queen 
was  ever  revealed.  At  length  the  quest  was 
given  up.  The  Spaniards  built  homes  around 
the  missions  established  by  the  priests,  and 
with  the  help  of  the  Indians  they  tilled  the 
soil,  planted  vineyards,  and  were  content  with 
the  plentiful  annual  harvests.  Gradually  little 
villages  grew  up  and  the  country  became  set- 
tled. But  it  remained  Spanish,  many  of  the 
inhabitants  being  descendants  of  those  old  ad- 
venturers who  had  first  come  hither  in  search 
of  gold. 

For  three  hundred  years  peace  and  content 
reigned  in  the  valleys ;  then,  in  a  moment,  all 
things  were  changed,  as  if  by  magic,  by  the 
discovery  of  gold  in  the  Sacramento  Valley. 
California  had,  by  the  treaty  with  Mexico, 
which  ended  the  Mexican  War,  become  a  part 
of  the  United  States.  The  news  of  the  great 
discovery  had  to  be  carried  by  sailing-vessel 
around  Cape  Horn  to  the  East,  but  no  sooner 


74  BRET   HARTE 


was  it  received  than  there  began  a  wild  rush 
for  the  Pacific  coast.  These  adventurers  were 
not  dressed  in  doublet  and  hose,  like  the  Span- 
ish cavaliers,  nor  did  they  sail  in  those,  gaily 
decked  vessels  with  which  the  old  Greeks  loved 
to  propitiate  fortune.  They  came  instead  from 
every  class,  and  they  travelled  in  any  conceiv- 
able conveyance  that  could  be  placed  on  wheels ; 
many,  indeed,  went  on  foot,  for  the  voyage  was 
long  and  expensive,  and  the  overland  route 
was  in  the  main  preferred.  Every  country  in 
Europe  sent  emigrants  to  swell  the  numbers  of 
the  gold-seekers,  and  soon  the  prairies  and 
plains  of  the  West  seemed  alive  with  the  wagon 
trains,  which  kept  close  together  from  fear  of 
the  Indians. 

When  the  gold-fields  were  at  last  reached 
they  were  soon  taken  possession  of  by  the  ad- 
venturers, who  had  turned  soldiers  in  a  com- 
mon cause.  Their  camp-fires  gleamed  from 
valley,  and  hill,  and  mountain  pass,  and  the  en- 
tire country  was  turned  into  a  great  camp. 

Many  of  the  towns  of  California  had  been 
deserted  in  the  first  rush,  and  as  the  trades- 


BRET   HARTE  75 


people,  farmers,  and  mechanics  were  equally 
engaged  in  the  search  for  gold,  all  other  busi- 
ness was  for  the  time  being  paralyzed.  It  be- 
came almost  impossible  to  buy  the  ordinary 
articles  of  food  and  clothing,  and  any  chance 
vessel  which  was  willing  to  dispose  of  its  cargo 
might  do  so  at  fabulous  prices. 

Wigwams,  tents,  brush-huts,  and  log-houses 
served  as  dwellings  for  Americans,  Mexicans, 
Germans,  Frenchmen,  Austrians,  Hollanders, 
Chinese,  and  men  of  other  nationalities,  who 
lived  and  worked  side  by  side,  shared  one  an- 
other's hopes  and  disappointments  and  suc- 
cesses, and  made  it  apparent  that  in  the  miners' 
camp  at  least  all  men  were  brothers. 

During  the  early  years  of  the  California  emi- 
gration, when  the  first  excitement  had  abated, 
but  while  all  the  picturesque  elements  of  the 
life  still  remained,  there  came  to  the  gold-fields 
a  bright  boy,  who  had  left  his  home  in  Albany, 
N.  Y.,  to  better  his  fortunes  in  the  West.  This 
was  Francis  Bret  Harte,  whose  father  had  been 
a  teacher  in  an  Albany  seminary.  The  boy 
himself  tried  teaching  on  his  arrival,  but  the 


^6  BRET   HARTE 


attempt  was  unsuccessful,  and  he  turned  his 
attention  to  mining.  And  here,  because  he 
was  a  poet,  he  saw  many  things  that  escaped 
the  eyes  of  others.  Here,  where  the  cultivated 
man  of  Oxford  or  Harvard  University  worked 
with  pick  and  pan  beside  the  German  peasant 
and  unlettered  Chinese,  he  saw  a  new  picture 
of  life,  but  still  a  true  picture,  because  it  re- 
flected human  nature.  His  finer  sense  grasped 
the  poetry,  the  courage,  and  the  heroism  that 
often  inspired  this  eager  search  for  gold.  He 
understood  how  the  hope  of  the  common 
laborer  and  the  dream  of  the  scholar  might 
spring  from  unselfishness,  and  he  saw  that  here, 
as  on  other  fields,  battles  were  lost  nobly  as 
well  as  nobly  won.  He  saw,  too,  that  as  years 
went  on  all  the  foreign  elements  which  made 
up  the  California  of  that  day  would  blend  to 
furnish  a  unique  page  of  American  history. 
And  because  it  is  the  office  of  literature  to 
record  history,  he  believed  that  whoever  should 
preserve  in  prose  and  verse  the  every-day  scenes 
of  that  strange  life  would  be  doing  valuable 
work. 


BRET  HARTE  TJ 


His  life  at  the  mines  was  hardly  more  suc- 
cessful than  had  been  his  school-teaching  ex- 
perience, and  by  and  by  he  became  a  compos- 
itor in  a  printing-office.  Soon  afterward  he 
composed  his  first  article  in  type  without 
previously  writing  it  down,  and  so  his  literary 
career  began.  A  little  later  he  entered  the 
office  of  the  San  Francisco  Era,  then  an 
important  newspaper  on  the  Pacific  slope. 
While  in  this  position  he  published  anony- 
mously a  few  sketches  of  life  on  the  frontier. 
These  stories,  so  full  of  the  genuine  flavor  of 
the  mining-camp,  attracted  some  attention,  but 
no  one  dreamed  that  they  heralded  a  new  voice 
in  American  literature.  Ten  years  after  the 
discovery  of  gold  a  magazine  was  organized  in 
California  under  the  title  The  Overland  Month- 
ly, and  Bret  Harte  was  made  its  editor.  In 
the  second  issue  of  the  magazine  he  published 
his  story,  "  The  Luck  of  Roaring  Camp," 
which  showed  how  rich  was  the  material  that 
lay  in  the  life  of  the  far  West  and  revealed  the 
impress  of  a  master  hand  in  literary  composi- 
tion.    In   California,   however,  the  story  was 


78  BRET   HARTE 


not  very  popular.  There  the  people  who  read 
at  all  found  their  enjoyment  in  the  books  and 
magazines  familiar  to  cultivated  society.  Into 
the  miners'  camps  came  copies  of  The  Edin- 
burgh Review  and  Pujich,  but  the  true  meaning 
of  the  life  of  which  they  themselves  formed  a 
part  had  not  yet  been  presented  to  these  eager 
adventurers. 

But  in  the  East  ''The  Luck  of  Roaring 
Camp "  was  received  with  enthusiastic  praise. 
The  Atla7itic  Monthly  at  once  offered  to  buy 
similar  sketches  from  the  author  —  who  had 
not  made  himself  known  —  and  other  peri- 
odicals and  reviews  spoke  generous  words  in 
favor  of  the  young  adventurer  into  this  new 
world  of  art.  Bret  Harte  became  famous  al- 
most in  a  day,  and  henceforth  it  was  his  task 
to  fulfil  his  boyish  dream  and  put  into  literary 
form  those  records  of  an  experience  that  was 
rapidly  passing  away.  Sketches,  stories,  poems, 
and  novels  followed  closely  upon  one  another. 
He  left  no  phase  of  this  many-sided  life  un- 
touched, and  the  series  grew  at  last  into  a 
faithful  record  of   the  most   picturesque   and 


BRET   HARTE  79 


romantic  episode  of  American  history.  What 
diverse  characters  came  to  the  writer's  side  and 
claimed  his  attention  as  he  wrote  !  Sometimes 
it  was  a  miner  who  had  failed  in  his  quest ; 
sometimes  a  Mexican  ranchero  with  his  light 
heart  and  merry  love-song ;  sometimes  a  con- 
vict who  had  escaped  from  prison  and  was 
trying  life  anew  in  the  freedom  of  the  camps. 
Often  it  would  be  a  little  child  who  would  seem 
to  tell  its  story  to  this  ever-listening  ear, — a 
waif,  perhaps,  who  had  drifted  into  that  wild 
company,  which  yet  kept  its  reverence  for  the 
innocence  of  childhood.  More  than  once  the 
hero  of  the  occasion  would  be  one  of  those 
wild  beasts  who  found  their  homes  in  the  vast- 
nesses  of  the  mountain  forests,  a  grizzly,  watch- 
ing with  a  dignified  sense  of  his  power  the 
incomprehensible  antics  of  man,  or  a  coyote 
slinking  along  a  dusty  road.  For  each  and 
all  the  author  became  a  faithful  chronicler,  and 
because  he  had  the  true  poet's  insight  he  be- 
came more  than  a  mere  chronicler.  He  lifted 
all  this  motley  assemblage  forever  out  of  the 
common-place  of  their  rough  lives  and  showed 


8o  BRET  HARTE 


that  each  was  still  real  man  or  woman  and 
genuine  kin  to  his  race.  Only  a  great  artist 
could  have  done  this.  Only  genius  could  have 
so  looked  beneath  the  exterior  and  found  there 
the  living  signs  of  the  brotherhood  of  man  ; 
the  same  genius  which  saw  but  a  humbler 
brother  still  in  the  ugly  shape  of  Bruin,  and 
to  whom  the  lazy  coyote  became  only  a  **  beg- 
ging friar  "  living  righteously  upon  the  largess 
of  others. 

As  a  background  to  his  stories  Bret  Harte 
paints  in  scenes  of  extraordinary  natural  beau- 
ty. He  shows  us,  under  the  sunlight  or 
wrapped  in  storms,  still  set  in  their  own  atmos- 
phere of  loneliness,  the  rude  camps  and  settle- 
ments, the  rivers  and  canons,  which  are  the 
haunts  of  his  characters.  The  writer  is,  in- 
deed, the  poet  of  nature  as  well  as  of  the  heart, 
and  can  reach  easily  her  varying  moods. 

Among  the  most  interesting  of  the  stories 
which  relate  to  child-life  are  **  A  Waif  of  the 
Plains,"  the  story  of  two  children  who  were 
separated  from  their  party  during  the  overland 
march  to  California  ;  ''  The  Christmas  Gift  that 


BRET   HARTE  8 1 


Came  to  Rupert,"  the  history  of  a  drummer- 
boy  ;  ''Wan  Lee,"  the  life  of  a  Httle  Chinese 
boy  in  San  Francisco;  "The  Story  of  Mliss," 
a  miner's  child,  and  **The  Queen  of  the  Pirate 
Island,"  a  delightful  conception,  possible  only 
to  that  land  of  bold  adventure  and  tempting 
treasure.  Perhaps  it  would  not  be  out  of  the 
way  to  include  among  these  juvenile  chronicles 
the  story  of  *'  A  Boy's  Dog  "  and  the  delightful 
experience  of  '*  Baby  Sylvester,"  a  fascinating 
bear  cub,  who  was  adopted  by  a  young  miner, 
and  fed  on  the  only  milk  that  ever  reached  the 
settlement — for  which  service  Adams'  Express 
made  special  trips.  He  could  play  tag,  roll  down 
hill,  take  the  cork  out  of  the  syrup-bottle  with 
his  teeth,  dance,  and  shake  hands,  and  when  he 
arrived  at  maturity  he  was  still  faithful  to  his 
friends,  and  showed  an  ugly  temper  only  to 
such  human  beings  as  annoyed  him. 

Bret  Harte's  poems,  like  his  prose,  preserve 
the  varying  conditions  of  early  frontier  life. 
They  include  also  many  verses  written  during 
the  Civil  War,  among  which  "John  Burns  of 
Gettysburg,"  "Caldwell  of  Springfield,"  "The 


S2  BRET   HARTE 


Reveille,"  and  *' How  Are  You,  Sanitary?" 
are  the  most  notable.  Here,  too,  is  found 
that  exquisite  little  idyl,  ''  Battle  Bunny,"  the 
story  of  a  white  rabbit  which  was  scared  from 
its  hiding-place  and  took  refuge  in  a  soldier's 
bosom  as  the  two  armies  faced  each  other  be- 
fore battle. 

Some  of  his  best  verses  are  written  in  the 
dialect  of  the  camps,  and  are  full  of  his  own  de- 
lightful, distinctive  pathos  and  humor.  "Jim," 
''  Dow's  Flat,"  "  Plain  Language  from  Truth- 
ful James,"  ''Babes  in  the  Wood,"  and  "The 
Hawk's  Nest"  are  among  those  that  thus  re- 
produce some  characteristic  incidents  of  the 
wild  life.  His  poem,  "The  Heathen  Chinee," 
was  not  intended  for  publication,  but  was  writ- 
ten as  a  harmless  skit  for  the  amusement  of 
two  or  three  comrades.  When  a  sudden  exi- 
gency of  the  magazine  dragged  it  from  the 
reluctant  author's  portfolio,  from  Maine  to 
California  a  delighted  public  laughed  over  it, 
but  ^Ir.  Harte  himself  has  always  lamented 
the  fate  that  based  so  much  of  his  literary 
reputation  on  a  bit  of  unfair  doggerel. 


BRET   HARTE  83 


Although  he  has  spent  years  abroad,  both  as 
United  States  Consul  to  different  European 
cities  and  as  a  traveller,  Bret  Harte's  work  re- 
mains distinctly  American.  The  collection  of 
stories  now  numbers  nearly  thirty  volumes ; 
most  of  the  titles,  as  The  Schoolmistress  of 
Red  Gulch,  Snow- Bound  at  Eagles,  Two  Men 
of  Sandy  Bar,  and  Tennessee  s  Partner,  indi- 
cate the  scene  or  nature  of  the  sketch. 

He  is  the  historian  of  one  of  the  most  in- 
teresting movements  in  the  progress  of  the 
United  States — a  movement  which  began 
while  California  was  still  a  land  of  Mexican 
traditions,  of  grain  and  cattle-raising,  and  ended 
only  when  it  took  its  place  as  one  of  the  most 
important  States  of  the  Union.  No  one  but 
an  eye-witness  could  have  written  this  history 
faithfully,  and  American  literature  owes  one  of 
its  greatest  debts  to  the  man  whose  genius  has 
thus  illuminated  the  pages  of  the  nation's  life. 


CHAPTER  VII 


BAYARD   TAYLOR 


1825-1878 

When  William  Penn  stood  under  the  trees 
and  made  his  famous  treaty  with  the  Indians 
there  was  in  his  company  a  young  Quaker, 
whose  descendants  continued  for  generations 
to  be  honored  citizens  of  Pennsylvania.  As 
time  went  on  the  family  mixed  its  Quaker 
blood  with  that  of  some  neighboring  Ger- 
man Lutherans.  In  the  seventh  generation 
from  the  days  of  Penn  its  most  famous  off- 
spring, Bayard  Taylor,  born  at  Kennett  Square, 
in  1825,  was  as  nearly  German  as  Quaker,  and 
it  was  the  German  blood,  no  doubt,  which  gave 
his  nature  its  strain  of  poetry  and  romance. 

The  Taylor  family  were  simple  farmers,  and 
the  home  life  was  plain,  though  the  thrift  of 
both  father  and  mother  secured  the  children 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  85 

every  comfort.  The  mother's  one  desire  was 
that  her  children  should  become  quiet,  respect- 
able members  of  a  community  that  their  name 
had  honored  for  generations.  But  to  the 
fourth  child,  Bayard,  this  ambition  always 
seemed  narrow.  His  earliest  memories  of 
himself  were  connected  with  longings  to  flit 
as  far  beyond  the  home  nest  as  possible. 

At  four  years  of  age  he  became  a  reader  of 
books,  passing  in  due  time  from  Peter  Parley 
to  Gibbon,  and  learning  Scott  and  Campbell 
by  heart,  as  well  as  copying  long  extracts  from 
their  works.  Kennett  Square  possessed  a  pub- 
lic library,  volume  after  volume  of  which  was 
devoured  by  young  Bayard.  When  he  was 
seven  years  old  he  set  himself  gravely  to  the 
business  of  writing  poetry,  placing  his  own 
verses  with  much  satisfaction  among  his  copied 
extracts  from  the  great  poets. 

Fond  as  he  was  of  books,  he  was  yet  a  genu- 
ine child,  who  delighted  in  playing  tricks,  and 
had  a  very  real  terror  of  a  piece  of  lonely 
woodland  that  he  had  to  pass  through  on  his 
way  to  school. 


86  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

He  was  an  out-of-doors  boy,  too,  and  spent 
hours  in  swamp  and  field  making  collections  of 
frogs  and  baby  turtles,  eggs,  and  mineralogical 
specimens.  Among  his  other  interests  was  a 
fondness  for  drawing.  He  illustrated  his  own 
little  manuscript  book  of  verses,  and  made  pict- 
ures for  the  poems  of  his  favorite  authors. 
But  his  chief  passion  was  a  desire  to  travel. 

Books  of  travel  and  descriptions  of  foreign 
lands  were  read  and  re-read  and  almost  learned 
by  heart.  When  called  upon  to  write  compo- 
sitions at  school  he  invariably  chose  for  his 
theme  some  imaginary  adventure  in  a  strange 
country,  or  some  fanciful  description  of  a  re- 
mote corner  of  the  earth,  whose  name  alone 
was  familiar  to  him.  Long  afterward,  in 
speaking  of  this  desire  of  his  childhood,  he 
said  that  he  envied  the  birds  their  wings,  and 
would  have  given  his  life  to  make  an  ascent  in 
a  balloon. 

His  father  had  no  sympathy  with  these  boy- 
ish fancies.  He  intended  to  make  a  farmer 
of  Bayard,  and  he  scolded  vigorously  over  his 
son's  nonsensical  ambitions.     But  farm  service 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  87 

and  farm  life  were  distasteful  to  the  boy.  He 
often  shirked  his  duties,  and  his  mother  fre- 
quently set  him  small  tasks  about  the  house, 
out  of  pity  for  his  intense  dislike  of  the  work 
of  field  or  garden. 

When  he  was  fourteen  Bayard  was  sent  to 
Unionville  Academy,  where  he  received  his  last 
and  best  school  training  from  a  competent  and 
earnest  teacher.  He  studied  Latin,  French, 
and  mathematics,  and  among  the  young  coun- 
trymen who  came  there  for  study  he  found  two 
or  three  friends  whom  he  kept  for  life. 

When  he  was  fifteen,  with  two  of  these 
friends  he  walked  from  Unionville  to  the 
Brandywine,  noted  as  the  scene  of  one  of  the 
famous  battles  of  the  Revolution.  This  little 
journey,  the  first  flight  of  the  boy  into  the 
world,  made  a  deep  impression  upon  him. 
More  than  ever  he  longed  to  breathe  the  air  of 
wider  skies,  to  learn  the  lessons  taught  by  the 
art  and  history  of  the  past,  and  to  offer  to  the 
world's  work  some  contribution,  perhaps,  which 
should  not  be  valueless.  He  wrote  a  brief,  but 
vivid,  description  of  his  little  trip,  which  was 


88  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

published  in  the  Westchester  Register,  a  local 
paper  of  some  repute.  It  was  the  first  time 
he  had  seen  his  name  in  print,  and  its  appear- 
ance thrilled  him  with  hope. 

A  year  later  the  Saturday  Evening  Post,  of 
Philadelphia,  printed  his  first  published  poem, 
''The  SoHloquy  of  a  Young  Poet."  Like 
Longfellow,  he  himself  had  carried  his  first 
offering  surreptitiously  to  the  newspaper  office. 
As  he  read  that  the  verses  of  '*  Selim,"  his  pen 
name,  had  been  accepted,  he  seemed  to  stand 
on  air. 

There  is  no  more  attractive  picture  of  am- 
bitious and  noble  youth  than  we  get  of  Bayard 
Taylor  at  this  moment.  From  childhood  he 
had  dreamed  dreams  far  beyond  the  imagina- 
tion of  ordinary  children.  He  had  read  poetry 
with  his  heart  full  of  admiration  for  the  men 
who  could  turn  life  to  such  golden  uses.  He 
gave  the  simple  and  innocent  worship  of  his 
young  soul  to  the  famous  authors  who  had 
taught  him  the  meaning  and  riches  of  art.  A 
letter  which  he  received  from  Dickens  in  reply 
to  one  of  his  own  brought   him  the  greatest 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  89 


joy,  and  any  whisper  from  the  great  world  be- 
yond his  own  delighted  him. 

At  seventeen  he  finished  his  course  at 
Unionville  Academy  and  went  back  to  the 
farm.  But  in  his  heart  he  was  devoted  to  the 
literary  life.  From  his  own  confessions  we 
know  how  he  consecrated  himself  to  this  work, 
cherishing  a  vision  of  high  achievement  and  a 
hope  that  in  the  great  march  of  life  he  might 
not  be  found  laggard. 

Winning  his  father's  consent  to  his  learning 
the  printer's  trade,  he  worked  for  two  years  in 
the  office  of  The  Village  Record,  of  West- 
chester. During  this  time  he  studied  Spanish, 
continued  German,  and  wrote  poems,  which 
appeared  in  Grahams  Magazine.  But  Bayard 
Taylor,  while  setting  type  in  the  office  of  The 
Village  Record,  was  in  spirit  far  away  from 
the  quiet  Pennsylvania  town,  meditating  voy- 
ages of  discovery  into  new  worlds,  and  when 
he  published  his  first  volume  of  poems,  in  the 
early  part  of  1842,  the  venture  was  a  bid  not 
so  much  for  fame  as  for  funds  to  start  him  on 
his  travels. 


go  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

The  little  book,  under  the  title  Ximena  ;  or, 
the  Battle  of  Sierra  Morena,  and  other  Poems, 
was  published  by  subscription.  He  sent  copies 
to  Lowell  and  Longfellow,  whose  approval 
he  coveted,  signing  himself  their  "  stranger 
friend."  The  book  did  not  bring  in  money 
enough  for  a  European  journey.  But  the  poet 
was  young  and  strong  and  possessed  indomit- 
able perseverance.  He  had  often  walked  the 
thirty  miles  that  lay  between  his  home  and 
Philadelphia,  and  he  felt  that  he  could  walk 
through  Europe.  At  any  rate,  he  meant  to 
try  it.  After  many  disappointments  he  se- 
cured two  or  three  engagements  to  write  news- 
paper letters  from  abroad,  receiving  some  pay 
in  advance,  and  with  this,  added  to  another 
small  store,  he  sailed  for  England,  taking  a 
second-cabin  passage  in  July,  1844. 

Now  began  as  interesting  and  romantic  a 
career  as  even  our  poet  could  have  desired. 
Two  friends  joined  him  in  his  pilgrimage. 
Both  were  like  Bayard  Taylor  himself,  young, 
strong,  and  ambitious.  When  they  caught 
sight   of   the    Irish   coast,    after   a  voyage   of 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  91 

nearly  four  weeks,  it  seemed  to  them  that 
they  had  entered  another  world.  Dressed  in 
student's  cap  and  blouse,  with  knapsack  on 
back  and  pilgrim  staff  in  hand,  Bayard  Taylor 
made  the  tour  of  Europe.  Like  a  true  vagrant, 
he  wandered  hither  and  thither  as  his  fancy  led 
him.  For  six  months  he  studied  German  in 
Frankfort,  living  in  the  family  of  a  burgher, 
and  sharing  with  them  their  feasts  and  holiday 
merriment  in  true  German  fashion.  Though 
poor  in  purse,  he  was  not  too  poor  to  recipro- 
cate their  many  kindnesses  to  him  and  his 
friends,  and  he  tells  a  funny  story  of  a  Christ- 
mas gift  bestowed  upon  their  kind  hosts.  It 
was  decided  to  make  the  worthy  Germans  a 
present  of  a  carpet,  such  luxuries  being  un- 
known to  the  frugal  household.  The  young 
students  laid  it  down  at  night  after  the  family 
had  gone  to  bed,  but  in  the  morning  they 
were  somewhat  dismayed  to  find  that  the 
housewife  could  not  be  induced  to  step  upon 
it.  It  required  much  argument  to  persuade 
her  that  the  gift  was  meant  for  service,  and  it 
is  likely  that  she  would  have  abandoned  her 


92  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

sitting-room  while  the  carpet  remained  had  not 
the  donors  insisted  upon  its  use. 

From  his  strain  of  German  blood,  perhaps, 
Bayard  Taylor  took  more  kindly  to  German 
life  and  thought  than  to  any  other.  As  he 
journeyed  through  the  old  picturesque  towns, 
and  wandered  by  the  banks  of  the  rivers,  that 
had  been  famous  since  the  times  of  Caesar,  he 
felt  fall  upon  him  the  spirit  of  romance  and 
mystery  which  seemed  ever  to  brood  over  this 
land.  He  loved  the  people  with  their  simple 
lives  and  solid  intellectuality,  and  the  legends 
and  stories  which  clustered  around  their  moun- 
tains and  forests  seemed  to  come  to  him  like 
reviving  memories  of  his  own  experience. 

In  the  spirit  of  the  old  wandering  bards  he 
made  his  way  through  the  sombre  forests  of 
the  Hartz  Mountains,  and  rejoiced  like  a 
young  viking  that  he  was  able  to  ascend  the 
Brocken  in  a  raging  storm. 

All  this  time  he  was  studying  hard  at  Ger- 
man, preparing  himself  unknowingly  for  one 
of  the  great  labors  of  his  life.  All  this  time, 
too,  he   was  pressed    for   money.     Travelling 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  93 

through  Austria,  crossing  the  Alps,  visiting 
Italy,  he  found  it  always  necessary  to  earn 
his  daily  bread.  Sometimes  he  lived  on  six 
cents  a  day,  and  thought  bread,  and  figs, 
and  roasted  chestnuts  sumptuous  fare.  Once 
his  shoes  were  so  worn  that  they  would  not 
bear  him  another  step,  and  he  had  to  wait  five 
days  at  an  inn  until  a  letter  came  with  remit- 
tances from  his  publishers.  Again  he  was  so 
poor  that  he  could  take  only  deck  passage  on 
the  voyage  from  Italy  to  France,  and  made  the 
trip  with  his  knapsack  for  a  pillow,  drenched 
to  the  skin  and  suffering  horribly  from  seasick- 
ness. 

But  he  accomplished  his  desire.  When  he 
returned  home,  after  a  two-years'  absence,  he 
found  that  his  letters  in  the  New  York  Tribune 
and  other  papers  had  won  him  sufficient  fame  to 
warrant  their  publication  in  book  form.  N.  P. 
Willis,  the  never-failing  friend  of  young  authors, 
wrote  a  preface,  and  Views  Afoot  came  out  un- 
der as  pleasant  auspices  as  could  be  desired, 
and  passed  through  six  editions  in  one  year. 

The  appearance  of  this  book  marked  the  be- 


94  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

ginning  of  that  larger  literary  life  to  which 
Bayard  Taylor  aspired  and  which  he  attained. 
A  great  and  immediate  satisfaction  came  to 
him  now  through  friendly  letters  from  older 
writers,  who  gave  the  book  generous  praise 
and  welcomed  the  young  author  cordially  to 
their  guild.  During  a  visit  to  Boston  made 
at  this  time  Bayard  Taylor  was  overwhelmed 
with  delight  at  the  kind  reception  given  him 
by  Longfellow  and  the  other  men  whose 
friendship  he  had  always  longed  for.  The  pub- 
lication of  his  poem,  **The  Norseman's  Ride," 
a  few  months  later  brought  him  a  letter  from 
Whittier,  and  marked  the  beginning  of  a 
friendship  which  lasted  through  life. 

After  an  unsuccessful  attempt  at  publishing 
a  county  newspaper  in  Pennsylvania,  Bayard 
Taylor  decided  to  try  his  fortunes  in  New 
York. 

The  city  still  retained  many  of  the  character- 
istics which  made  it  a  congenial  home  for  liter- 
ary workers  in  the  days  when  Irving  and  Bry- 
ant, Cooper,  Halleck,  and  Drake  were  winning 
their  fame. 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  95 


The  wealth  and  fashion  still  centred  in  the 
lower  part  of  the  town  in  broad,  old-fashioned 
streets,  whose  houses  were  noted  alike  for  their 
culture  and  hospitality. 

New  York  then,  as  now,  led  the  newspaper 
work  of  the  country,  and  the  younger  writers 
were  glad  of  positions  on  the  dailies  and  week- 
lies. Bayard  Taylor  obtained  a  position  on  The 
Literary  World  at  five  dollars  a  week,  and 
earned  four  dollars  more  by  teaching  in  a  girls' 
school.  But  he  had  already  won  a  fair  start  in 
the  literary  field,  and  his  friends  looked  on  his 
success  as  assured.  Their  faith  was  realized  ; 
within  a  year  Taylor  was  advanced  to  a  posi- 
tion of  twelve  dollars  a  week  on  the  Tribune, 
w^hile  writing  articles  for  magazines. 

From  this  time  Bayard  Taylor's  literary  life 
divides  itself  into  that  of  traveller,  newspaper 
writer,  lecturer,  novelist  and  poet. 

Scarcely  had  he  won  his  place  in  New 
York  when  he  was  sent  by  the  Tribune  to 
California  to  visit  the  newly  discovered  gold 
regions  and  report  the  life  of  the  mining 
camps.     Bayard  Taylor  was  the  prince  of  those 


96  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

literary  free  lances,  the  newspaper  correspond- 
ents, who  start  on  adventures  as  wild  and  full 
of  danger  as  those  encountered  by  knight  or 
soldier  of  old.  Civilization  owes  much  to 
these  men,  always  ready  and  full  of  pluck, 
and  who  count  danger  of  small  moment  in 
pursuit  of  duty. 

Bayard  Taylor  sailed  from  New  York  for 
California  by  way  of  the  Isthmus  of  Panama, 
taking  from  June  till  August  for  the  journey. 
He  immediately  threw  his  lot  in  with  the 
miners,  sharing  their  dangers  and  privations, 
and  became  the  poet  of  the  California  emigra- 
tion as  Bret  Harte  afterward  became  its  histor- 
ian. He  slept  often  on  the  ground  with  his 
saddle  for  a  pillow,  toiled  through  ravines,  trav- 
ersed forests,  encountered  Indians  and  wild 
beasts.  In  Mexico,  on  his  return,  he  had  an 
adventure  with  robbers. 

But  he  had  caught  the  spirit  of  that  marvel- 
lous outburst  of  energy  which  in  a  few  years 
transformed  the  thinly  inhabited  Pacific  slope 
into  a  region  of  towns  and  cities,  whose  aggre- 
gated wealth  was  almost  beyond  credence.    The 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  9/ 


record  of  what  he  saw,  published  under  the 
title  Eldorado ;  or,  Adventures  in  the  Path 
of  Empire,  was  a  picturesque  and  valuable 
contribution  to  the  literature  of  the  gold  dis- 
covery. 

The  next  year  found  him  again  upon  his 
travels.  This  time  he  fulfilled  an  old  dream 
by  visiting  the  Orient.  His  excellence  as  a 
reporter  of  things  comes  from  his  power  to 
merge  his  own  personality  in  that  of  the  peo- 
ple he  met.  As  soon  as  he  entered  a  foreign 
land  he  ceased  to  be  Bayard  Taylor,  American 
traveller,  and  became  Arab,  Bedouin,  or  Turk, 
as  the  case  might  be. 

On  the  Nile  it  seemed  he  must  have  lived  al- 
ways in  Egypt,  and  he  was  served  by  his  boat- 
men with  peculiar  reverence,  as  if  they  recog- 
nize 1  in  him  a  higher  genius  of  their  own  race. 
In  Damascus  he  dressed  in  the  Syrian  costume 
and  smoked  his  pipe  sitting  cross-legged  upon 
the  roof-top.  In  Constantinople  he  wore 
even  the  Arab  burnouse  and  turban,  and  was 
addressed  in  Turkish  when  he  went  to  his 
bankers  for  money.     At  another  time  he  was 


98  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

denounced  as  an  infidel  by  an  Arab  who  saw 
him  drinking  water  on  a  fast-day.  He  himself 
rejoiced  in  the  strange  Oriental  life,  whose  cus- 
toms and  habits  of  thought  appealed  to  him  so 
strongly.  He  called  himself  a  worshipper  of 
the  sun,  and  says  that  standing  in  an  Eastern 
garden  of  flowers  he  took  off  his  hat  to  the  god 
of  day  like  a  veritable  Parsee.  In  India  he  be- 
came in  spirit  a  Hindoo,  and  visited  temples 
and  shrines  like  a  devotee.  Still  loyal  to  the 
mountain-tops,  he  climbed  the  highest  point  of 
the  Himalayas  accessible  in  the  winter  season, 
and  drank  in  the  solemn  and  majestic  beauty  of 
that  region  of  mystery. 

Under  orders  from  the  Tribune,  he  crossed 
Asia  overland  and  joined  the  United  States 
squadron  at  Shanghai,  where  Commodore 
Perry  gave  him  the  post  of  master's  mate  that 
he  might  witness  the  opening  of  the  ports  of 
Japan  to  the  commerce  of  the  world.  Finally 
he  sailed  from  China  for  New  York  by  way  of 
Cape  Horn,  reaching  home  two  years  and  six 
months  after  his  departure. 

Three  years  later  he  was  again  on  his  wan- 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  99 

derings.  After  a  short  visit  in  Germany  he 
started  for  the  north  and  travelled  through 
Sweden,  Denmark,  and  Lapland.  He  travelled 
hundreds  of  miles  by  reindeer,  penetrating  far 
within  the  Arctic  Circle  that  he  might  enjoy 
that  wonder  of  the  north,  *'  a  day  without  a 
sun."  A  year  after,  he  was  in  Greece  breakfasting 
on  "  honey  from  Hymettus,"  and  began  learning 
Greek  that  he  might  better  appreciate  the  mar- 
vels of  this  land  of  beauty.  In  the  same  year  he 
visited  Russia,  returning  to  America  in  1858. 

After  this,  travelling  occupied  less  of  his 
time,  although  he  again  made  a  tour  of  Europe, 
and  as  a  representative  of  the  Tribune  visited 
Iceland  during  the  celebration  of  its  millennial 
anniversary. 

Iceland,  the  land  of  old  memories  and  songs, 
impressed  him  strongly.  This  little  country, 
which  had  preserved  its  national  life  for  a 
thousand  years,  had  still  the  vigor  of  the  old 
viking  days,  when  its  sailors  ventured  without 
compass  or  chart  to  the  coasts  of  America,  and 
its  poets  sung  its  heroes'  praises  in  verse  that 
has  become  classic. 


?  8  0  S 


lOO  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

Taylor's  reputation  had  preceded  him  here, 
and  he  was  called  the  **  American  Skald  "  by 
the  enthusiastic  people. 

As  a  lecturer,  Bayard  Taylor's  fame  was  based 
upon  the  widely  diffused  reports  of  his  travels 
which  had  appeared  for  years  in  newspapers, 
magazines,  and  book  form.  He  published 
thousands  of  letters  and  eleven  books  of  travel, 
the  most  famous  of  these  volumes  including 
A  Journey  to  Central  Africa  ;  The  La^ids  of 
the  Saracen ;  A  Visit  to  India^  China^  ajid 
Japan;  Northern  Travel^  and  Travels  iit 
Greece  and  Russia. 

Through  these  publications  he  had  won  a 
name  which,  in  the  intervals  of  life  at  home 
made  him  the  most  popular  lecturer  of  his 
day.  He  delivered  hundreds  of  lectures  on 
his  travels,  his  enormous  capacity  for  hard 
work  making  this  possible  even  in  the  midst 
of  serious  literary  tasks.  Moreover,  he  had 
been  building  up  gradually  a  reputation  as  a 
novelist  and  poet.  His  first  novel,  Hannah 
Thurston,  is  an  American  story  of  manners,  the 
characters  of  which  are  drawn  from  Pennsyl- 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  lOI 

vania  life,  although  the  scene  is  supposed  to  be 
laid  elsewhere.  This  novel  was  successful  in 
America,  and  appeared  in  German,  Russian, 
and  Swedish  translations ;  but  it  is  doubtful 
whether  its  fame  was  not  due  more  to  the 
author's  popularity  than  to  its  own  merit. 
The  second  novel,  John  Godfrey  s  Fortunes, 
was  much  more  individual  and  characteristic. 
In  this  were  incorporated  certain  experiences 
of  the  author's  own  literary  life.  There  is  a 
certain  vitality  about  these  reminiscences  that 
will  always  make  them  agreeable  reading.  The 
Story  of  Kennett,  the  third  novel,  is  the  most 
interesting  of  all.  It  is  largely  a  history  of 
the  village  life  of  the  author's  boyhood,  into 
which  are  woven  many  incidents  of  local  his- 
tory. The  tricks  which  the  Quaker  boys  play 
upon  their  sober-minded  father  and  the  ac- 
count of  the  runaway  match  were  family 
history,  while  the  descriptions  of  scenery,  the 
thousand  memories  of  boyhood,  and  the  tender 
handling  of  the  subject  all  reveal  the  loyal 
affection  in  which  the  author  held  the  past. 
One  other  novel,  Joseph  and  His  Friend,  with 


I02  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

some  short  stories  contributed  to  The  Atlantic 
and  other  magazines,  sums  up  Bayard  Taylor's 
work  in  fiction.  While  these  novels  were  suc- 
cessful in  their  day,  they  are  perhaps  the  least 
valuable  of  Bayard  Taylor's  work.  His  news- 
paper letters  and  his  books  of  travel  alike  are 
full  of  that  personal  charm  which  made  the 
author  one  of  the  most  popular  men  of  his 
day.  They  have,  besides  delightful  touches  of 
color  and  light,  a  ready  camaraderie^  and  a 
genuine  sentiment. 

But  neither  in  fiction  nor  tales  of  travel  did 
the  author  aspire  to  the  greatest  achievement 
of  his  life.  His  boyish  dream  had  been  to 
be  a  poet,  a  younger  brother  of  Goethe,  and 
Shakespeare,  and  his  best  work  is  unquestion- 
ably his  verse.  Unequal  though  he  is,  yet  Bay- 
ard Taylor  possessed  the  true  poet's  gift.  His 
chief  fault  lay  in  over-production.  He  wrote 
volume  after  volume  of  poetry  which  brought 
him  reputation  but  not  critical  approval.  His 
beauty-loving  nature  seemed  to  find  poetry 
everywhere,  and  to  demand  its  expression. 

Much  of  his  verse  passes  before  the  eye  like 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  IO3 

sunlit  pictures.  This  is  especially  true  of  the 
Poems  of  the  Orient.  Here  the  traveller, 
charmed  by  his  surroundings,  has  turned  poet, 
and  plucked  from  rose-garden  and  riverside  a 
glowing  wreath  of  song.  The  very  breath  of 
the  Orient  flows  through  these  poems,  which 
express  a  genuine  inspiration.  **  A  Boat  Song 
of  the  Nile;"  *'An  Arab  Warrior;"  "  Kil- 
imandjars  ;  or,  a  Russian  Boy  ; "  ''  Desert 
Hymn  to  the  Sun  ; "  ''  The  Arab  to  the  Palm," 
and  '*A  Bedouin's  Love-Song"  indicate  by 
their  titles  the  progress  of  the  poet's  pilgrim- 
age through  the  lands  whose  romantic  history 
had  haunted  his  youth.  In  these  and  other 
ballads  Bayard  Taylor  showed  the  temper  of 
the  genuine  lyrist.  Among  the  shorter  poems 
**  The  Song  of  the  Camp  "  has  won  a  place  in 
the  heart  of  the  people. 

The  longer  poems  embrace  pastorals,  trag- 
edies, masques,  and  a  drama.  All  show  care- 
ful workmanship,  for  Bayard  Taylor  always 
approached  his  art  with  a  feeling  that  it  de- 
manded the  best  that  he  could  give.  Many 
descriptive  passages  unvaryingly  of  great  beauty 


I04  BAYARD   TAYLOR 

are  found  scattered  through  this  work,  which 
is  pure  and  lofty  in  conception.  Among  these 
longer  poems  "The  Masque  of  the  Gods"  and 
"  Lars,  a  Pastoral  of  Norway,"  are  perhaps  the 
most  successful. 

One  of  the  great  ambitions  of  Bayard  Tay- 
lor was  achieved  in  his  translation  of  Goethe's 
Fatcst.  To  do  this  work  he  had  for  years 
studied  every  available  source  of  knowledge. 
His  familiarity  with  German  was  thorough, 
his  sympathy  with  German  thought  complete. 
No  man  of  his  generation  was  so  well  equipped 
for  the  work,  and  he  succeeded  in  producing 
a  poetic,  faithful,  and  spirited  translation  of 
the  great  original. 

One  other  ambition,  the  writing  of  the  life 
of  Goethe,  he  was  not  allowed  to  accomplish. 
When  apparently  only  in  the  midst  of  his 
career  he  died  suddenly  at  Berlin,  whither  he 
had  been  sent  as  Ambassador  from  the  United 
States.  His  early  death  was  felt  to  be  a 
serious  loss  to  American  letters,  as  his  accom- 
plished work  seemed  to  promise  still  higher 
achievement. 


BAYARD   TAYLOR  10$ 

Bayard  Taylor's  American  home  was  for 
many  years  at  Kennett  Square,  where  he  built 
a  charming  manor-house,  noted  for  its  hospital- 
ity as  well  as  for  the  distinguished  guests  who 
visited  it.  He  had  a  social  and  loving  nat- 
ure, and  easily  won  and  kept  the  friendships 
which  he  so  dearly  cherished.  The  poets 
Stoddard  and  Stedman  were  his  lifelong  inti- 
mates. His  boyish  desire  to  be  admitted  to 
the  circle  of  men  of  genius  found  its  realiza- 
tion in  the  place  he  held  in  the  hearts  of  the 
greatest  men  of  his  day. 

His  other  and  higher  youthful  hope — to 
perform  nobly  his  part  in  life — was  also  ful- 
filled. No  man  could  have  been  freer  from 
selfish  and  mean  undertakings  than  was  he. 
Whether  in  his  literary  work  or  in  his  diplo- 
matic service  he  was  ever  guided  by  one  prin- 
ciple— that  life  and  its  gifts  were  to  be  put  to 
their  best  uses,  and  that  the  measure  of  noble 
purpose  was  the  measure  of  the  man. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

WILLIAN    DEAN    HOWELLS 

1837— 

Perhaps  the  most  faithful  story  of  a  boy*s 
life  ever  written  is  given  to  us  in  A  Boys 
Town,  a  transcription  of  the  home  history  of 
William  Dean  Howells,  from  his  third  to  his 
eleventh  year.  The  "  Boy's  Town  "  was  Hamil- 
ton, O.,  whither  the  family  had  removed  from 
Martin's  Ferry,  the  birthplace  of  our  author, 
and  this  picture  of  a  Western  town  at  that 
period  has  thus  a  unique  value. 

The  greatest  charm  of  this  book  is  found  in 
the  utter  absence  of  anything  like  an  effort  at 
story-telling  proper.  There  are  no  hair-breadth 
escapes  and  few  adventures,  but  one  feels 
throughout  the  genuineness  of  this  revelation 
of  a  boy's  hopes  and  fears  and  ambitions. 
The  narrative  is  in  the  impersonal  form,  and  yet 
there  is  a  fascinating  camaraderie  at  once  estab- 
lished between  author  and  reader.    ''  When  I 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  10/ 

was  a  child "  is  the  note  that  sounds  through- 
out, and  this  magic  suggestion  colors  the  story 
with  that  reality  which  children  love  far  be- 
yond anything  else. 

These  child  pictures  show  us  the  home-life 
and  the  heart-life  of  the  writer  as  nothing  else 
could.  The  family  belonged  to  the  w^ell-to-do 
portion  of  the  community,  the  father  being 
perhaps  better  read  than  most  of  his  neigh- 
bors. Both  father  and  mother  were  wise  in 
the  best  sense  for  their  children's  good.  Of 
fun  and  frolic  there  was  plenty,  but  there 
was  also  the  firm  counsel  to  check  all  selfish- 
ness and  mean  ambitions,  to  nourish  regard  for 
others,  and  above  all  to  teach  right  doing  be- 
cause it  w^as  right.  Reading  between  the  lines 
we  see  that  this  father  and  mother,  with  their 
high  conceptions  of  duty  and  their  constant  ex- 
ample of  earnest  living  must  have  moulded  the 
character  of  their  children  on  broad  and  noble 
lines. 

There  is  a  delightful  little  confession  of  how 
the  boy  was  once  somewhat  ashamed  of  his 
father,  because  in  the  paper  which  he  edited  he 


I08  WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS 

opposed  the  Mexican  War.    The  leading  people 
of  Hamilton  were  in  favor  of  the  war  and  the 
children  took  sides  in  the  issue.     General  Tay- 
lor, the  hero  of  the  hour,  was  the  hero  of  the 
larger  portion  of  the  Hamilton  boys,  and  How- 
ells  keenly  felt  the  bitterness  of  unpopularity. 
But  a  little   later   he   appreciated  his   father's 
bravery  in  battling  day  after  day  for  a  principle, 
though  it  made  his  paper  unpopular  and  af- 
fected his  business  interests.     When    General 
Taylor  was  nominated  for  President,  the  paper 
strongly  opposed  his  candidacy,  because  of  his 
well-known  sympathy  with  the  cause  of  slav- 
ery.    To    favor   the    anti-slavery  cause  meant 
often  to  lose  one's  friends  and  position,  yet  the 
little   paper  became  the  organ  of  an  anti-slav- 
ery crusade.    Long  before  election  day  Howells 
had  ceased  to  be  ashamed  of  his  father,  and  had 
come  to  admire  his  stalwart  independence  and 
his  unselfish  heroism  in  fighting  for  what  he 
considered   right.     Such    an    example   as   this 
made  home  counsels  a  living  creed  and  wrought 
in  the  children  of  the  family  a  desire  to  bend 
life  to  high  uses. 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  IO9 

About  this  time  Howells  first  heard  the 
Biglow  Papers,  which  his  father  read  aloud  as 
they  came  out  in  the  Boston  paper,  and  the 
famous  Hosea  became  an  intimate  in  the 
family,  and  there  seems  after  this  never  to 
have  been  even  the  slightest  distrust  of  his 
father's  judgment. 

From  these  pictures  of  home  life  we  see  the 
Hamilton  of  Howells's  childhood  as  the  typical 
Western  town  of  the  day  which  had  not  yet 
quite  outgrown  the  period  of  frontier  life. 
All  around  the  town  were  log  cabins,  which 
served  as  the  outposts  of  the  unbroken  forests 
beyond,  and  it  was  to  the  forests  that  the  boys 
looked  for  their  inspiration  when  thinking  of 
the  ambitions  of  later  life.  They  w^ere  all  de- 
termined to  be — if  not  real  Indians,  since 
nature  had  so  cruelly  denied  that — yet  at  least 
Indian  hunters  and  slayers.  Periodically,  there 
were  companies  formed  for  the  extermination 
of  the  red  man,  and  the  highest  joy  was  to 
go  off  by  themselves  for  a  day's  camping  in 
the  woods,  and  try  to  forget  that  they  were 
the  children    of   uninteresting,   civilized  w^hite 


no  WILLIAM   DEAN  HO  WELLS 

people.  Howells  began  school  when  he  was 
still  very  young,  attending  first  a  small  private 
school,  and  later  the  public  school  of  the  town. 
Nothing  occurred  to  him  in  his  school-life  of 
such  importance  as  the  amazing  discovery  that 
he  could  make  poetry  by  rule.  He  found  this 
out  one  day  as  he  was  fumbling  the  leaves  of 
his  grammar,  and  he  accepted  the  statement 
that  poetry  could  be  made  by  rule  just  as  sol- 
emnly and  unequivocally  as  he  would  have 
accepted  a  similar  statement  in  regard  to  magic. 
From  this  time  he  never  ceased  until  he  had 
mastered  the  rules  of  prosody — a  word  which, 
in  itself,  must  have  sounded  like  an  incanta- 
tion. He  wrote  verses  with  the  most  inde- 
fatigable zeal,  and  he  had  the  uncommon  joy 
of  being  able  to  see  them  in  print,  for  standing 
upon  a  stool  in  his  father's  printing  office,  he 
set  up  the  type  himself,  and,  no  doubt,  watched 
the  presses  afterward  with  all  the  responsibility 
of  ownership.  Verse-making,  which  had  often 
been  tried  before,  now  assumed  a  greater  in- 
terest, and  before  very  long  the  young  author 
was   busy  upon  a  tragedy  founded  upon   the 


WILLIAM  DEAN   HOWELLS  III 

Stern  discipline  of  one  of  his  school-teachers. 
The  teacher  was  to  be  the  tyrant  against  whom 
the  boys  were  to  revolt,  much  in  the  same  way 
as  Spartacus  and  the  gladiators  revolted  against 
their  Roman  masters.  The  drama  was  finished, 
but  never  acted  by  the  school-boy  company 
selected  for  the  parts.  This,  however,  did  not 
discourage  the  young  author,  who  still  con- 
tinued writing  poetry. 

A  part  of  the  family  education  consisted  in 
the  father  s  reading  aloud  to  the  home  circle  in 
the  evening.  In  this  way  Howells  became 
acquainted  with  Moore's  Lalla  Rookh — which 
was  the  first  poem  he  ever  remembers.  Dick- 
ens's Christmas  Stories,  Scott's  Lady  of  the 
Lake,  and  some  of  the  best  English  novels 
became  familiar  to  him  at  the  same  time.  The 
first  books  outside  his  school-books  that  he  read 
himself  were  Goldsmith's  Histories  of  Greece 
and  Rome,  A  little  later  his  father  gave  him 
Don  Quixote,  and  one  of  his  literary  ventures 
was  a  romance  founded  upon  the  Conquest  of 
Granada  as  related  in  the  pages  of  Irving,  and 
which  he  read  over  and  over  without  tire. 


112  WILLIAM  DEAN  HO  WELLS 

In  fact  he  was  always  reading,  and  from  his 
very  young  boyhood  he  may  be  said  to  have 
been  always  writing ;  whatever  other  occupa- 
tion or  share  of  active  duty  became  his,  seems 
in  his  own  mind  to  have  been  outside  his  real 
mission,  which  was  that  of  writing.  In  this  he 
persisted  always,  so  that  he  may  be  said  to  have 
grown  up  into  authorship. 

Outside  the  home  and  school  life  were  the 
never-ending  and  varied  experiences  of  ordi- 
nary boy  life.  There  were  muster  and  elec- 
tion days,  when  the  boys  watched  the  soldiers 
drill  with  solemn  joy,  and  straightway  inau- 
gurated military  companies  among  themselves. 
There  were  Christmas  holidays,  which  the 
boys  celebrated,  for  some  reason  unknown 
to  Eastern  boys,  with  guns  and  pistols,  fire- 
crackers,  and  torpedoes.  There  were  Easter- 
day,  when  they  cracked  their  colored  eggs 
together  in  a  game  of  win  and  lose ;  and  April 
fools'  day;  and  the  annual  May  party,  when 
the  girls  took  the  lead  and  the  boys  were 
content  to  play  a  secondary  part ;  and  Fourth 
of    July     celebrated     with     processions     and 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  II3 

speeches  and  the  usual  noise.  What  would 
have  seemed  strange  to  a  New  England 
boy  was  the  absence  of  any  Thanksgiving  Day, 
of  which  Howells  did  not  even  hear  the  name 
in  childhood.  Occasionally  travelling  shows 
and  circuses  came  to  Hamilton,  and  some- 
times a  theatre  company,  and  at  such  a  time 
the  Howells  children,  owing  to  their  fathers 
newspaper  connection,  were  fortunate  in  being 
provided  with  tickets  that  lasted  throughout 
these  short  seasons  of  joy.  Besides  these 
amusements  there  were  nutting  and  shooting 
in  the  forest,  fishing  in  the  Miami  River, 
swimming  in  the  canal  and  canal  basins,  and 
the  summer  and  winter  sports  in  due  season, 
many  of  which  held  still  that  flavor  of  wildness 
which  suggested  the  early  frontier  life. 

When  Howells  was  ten  years  old  he  left 
school  and  began  to  learn  the  printer's  trade  in 
his  father's  oflice,  and  not  very  long  afterward 
the  family  removed  to  Dayton  ;  A  Boys  Town 
ends  with  an  account  of  this  removal,  and  a 
pathetic  little  picture  of  how  homesick  How- 
ells became  for  the  old  home.     So  homesick 

8 


114  WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS 

indeed  was  he  that  there  was  nothing  to  do  but 
let  him  return  there  for  a  visit,  a  remedy  which 
cured  him  so  effectually  that  he  no  sooner 
reached  Hamilton  than  he  started  back  for 
Dayton,  possessed  by  a  feeling  even  stronger 
than  homesickness,  and  that  was  mother-sick- 
ness. At  Dayton  Howells  and  his  elder 
brother  helped  with  the  new  paper  which  their 
father  had  bought.  They  worked  at  the  com- 
positors' cases,  and  when  it  was  sometimes 
necessary  would  rise  early  in  the  morning  and 
help  distribute  the  papers.  Their  education 
was  carried  on  by  their  father  in  the  evening, 
and  he  also  superintended  the  reading  in  which 
the  boys  now  indulged  on  a  somewhat  larger 
scale.  One  chief  delight  of  the  children  at 
this  period  was  the  number  of  travelling 
theatre  companies  which  visited  Dayton ;  very 
often  the  best  talent  of  the  country  was  to  be 
found  among  the  strollers,  and  it  was  in  this 
way  that  Howells  became  very  well  acquainted 
with  the  Shakespearean  drama,  and  with  old 
English  comedy,  as  well  as  with  the  actors 
and  actresses  who  had  attained,  or  were  des- 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  II5 

tined  to  attain,  an  honorable  celebrity.  The 
Dayton  home  was  a  happy  one,  where  the  in- 
tellectual growth  kept  steady  pace  with  the 
physical.  But  financially  the  paper  was  not  a 
success,  and  the  family  was  obliged  to  seek 
another  home. 

Howells  and  his  father  walked  from  Dayton 
to  the  new  home,  driving  the  cow  and  talking 
philosophy.  This  period  of  his  life  is  preserved 
in  Howells's  charming  book,  One  Year  in  a  Log 
Cabin.  It  is  a  delightful  transcription  of  the 
idyllic  life  of  the  woods.  The  little  log  cabin 
w^as  almost  as  primitive  as  those  built  by  the 
early  settlers.  The  children  helped  the  father 
cover  the  walls  with  newspapers  and  glaze  the 
windows  ;  the  great  open  fireplace,  w^here  all 
the  cooking  was  done  and  where  the  bread  was 
baked  in  a  Dutch  oven  set  on  the  coals,  was  a 
new  and  delightful  joy  to  them  ;  so  was  the 
unbroken  forest,  around  which  still  clustered 
memories  of  Indian  warfare.  At  night  these 
memories,  mixed  w^ith  the  Indian  tales  which 
the  boys  read  insatiably,  made  the  bed-time 
hour  one  to  be  dreaded. 


Il6  WILLIAM   DEAN    HOWELLS 

With  true  American  indifference  to  circum- 
stances the  family  life  went  on  in  the  same 
grooves.  The  manner  of  earning  the  living 
was  different,  but  the  study  and  reading  con- 
tinued, the  father  still  acting  as  teacher.  In 
his  book,  My  Literary  Passions,  Howells  has 
told  us  the  books  that  charmed  him  above  all 
others  as  a  boy.  These  were  Goldsmith's  His- 
tory of  Greece,  Don  Quixote,  and  Irving's  Con- 
quest of  Granada.  As  he  read  these  books  he 
was  for  the  time  being  an  Alcibiades  or  Don 
Quixote  as  the  case  might  be.  So  powerful 
was  his  sympathy  with  all  heroic  deeds  that  in 
reading  Irving  he  could  never  decide  whether 
he  were  Moor  or  Spaniard.  His  boy  friends 
— especially  one  who  had  worsted  him  in  a 
school-boy  battle — had  infinite  respect  for  his 
knowledp^e  of  the  ancients  and  referred  to  him 
for  information  with  a  deference  that  must 
have  been  soothing.  He  says  that  later  he 
rather  liked  the  Romans  better  than  the 
Greeks,  because  they  were  less  civilized,  and 
more,  in  fact,  like  boys. 

For  the  want  of  space  a  large  part  of  the 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  11/ 

family  library  still  remained  packed  in  barrels, 
and  rummaging  in  these  one  day  Howells 
came  upon  the  poems  of  Longfellow.  It  was 
his  first  introduction  to  that  poet,  w^ho  w^as 
thereafter  associated  with  the  happy  memories 
of  this  forest  home.  A  life  so  close  to  nature 
left  its  own  mark  upon  mind  and  soul,  and  this 
is  seen  in  that  rare  quality,  the  idealization  of 
childhood,  which  runs  through  the  pages  of 
Ojie  Year  in  a  Log  Cabin. 

This  glimpse  of  frontier  life  seen  through 
eyes  still  young,  has  a  charm  like  that  of  Long- 
fellow's reminiscent  poems  of  youth,  or  Whit- 
tier's  transcriptions  of  his  boyhood,  in  which 
the  perfume  of  childhood  still  lingers  around 
the  deeper  experiences  of  the  man. 

The  log-cabin  life  gave  place  to  newspaper 
work  and  another  season  in  the  printing  office 
at  Columbus.  Between  sixteen  and  seventeen 
a  love  for  reading  Shakespeare  possessed 
Howells,  and  with  a  young  friend,  also  given 
to  verse  making,  he  would  spend  afternoons 
in  the  country  while  they  alternately  read  the 
tragedies  and  comedies  of  the  great  dramatist. 


Il8  WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS 

And  so,  although  his  education  was  desultory, 
by  the  time  he  was  twenty  he  was  well  read  in 
the  English  classics,  and  had  besides  a  good 
knowledge  of  American  literature. 

Before  very  long  Howells  became  known  as 
one  of  the  cleverest  young  newspaper  writers 
of  the  West.  He  also  began  to  publish  verses 
in  the  newspapers.  A  trip  down  the  Mississippi 
to  St.  Louis  gave  him  a  new  experience  of  life, 
which  he  embodied  in  a  poem.  The  Pilot's 
Story,  a  picture  out  of  the  history  of  slave  life. 
This  poem  was  published  in  the  Atlantic 
Monthly,  in  which  other  poems  from  time  to 
time  appeared.  About  this  time  Howells  pub- 
lished a  book  of  poems,  in  which  were  included 
the  verses  of  a  young  poet  friend,  and  very 
slowly  he  began  to  gain  a  reputation  for  good 
verse  making. 

When  Lincoln  was  nominated  for  President 
Howells  was  asked  by  a  Columbus  publishing 
house  to  write  a  life  of  the  candidate.  For 
this  he  received  one  hundred  and  sixty  dollars, 
and  he  could  conceive  no  better  use  for  it  than 
to  enlarge  his  knowledge  of  the  world.     He 


I 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  II9 

accordingly  made  a  trip  to  Montreal  and 'Que- 
bec, stopping,  on  his  return,  at  Boston. 

Here  he  became  acquainted  with  James  Rus- 
sell Lowell,  then  editor  of  the  Atlantic,  with 
Oliver  Wendell  Holmes,  and  with  other  writers 
of  note,  who  received  the  young  author  with 
kindness,  and  whose  encouragement  at  that 
time  was  of  the  utmost  value.  In  his  twenty- 
fifth  year  Howells  received  from  President 
Lincoln  the  appointment  of  United  States 
Consul  to  Venice,  where  he  lived  for  the  next 
four  years,  making,  in  the  meantime,  trips  to 
other  places  of  interest,  and  familiarizing  him- 
self with  Italian  literature.  The  result  of  this 
experience  is  found  in  his  charming  book,  Ve- 
netian Life,  which  was  published  in  London 
in  1866,  and  in  the  volume,  Italian  Journeys^ 
published  in  New  York  a  year  later.  These 
two  volumes  mark  the  beginning  of  the  serious 
work  of  Mr.  Howells's  life.  Although  only 
sketches  of  the  every-day  life  of  modern  Italy, 
they  are  yet  full  of  that  peculiar  quality  which 
later  was  to  stamp  his  fiction  and  give  it  a  high 
place  in  American  literature. 


120  WILLIAM  DEAN   HOWELLS 

Upon  his  return  to  America  Howells  lived 
for  a  short  time  in  New  York,  and  did  work 
for  the  Times,  the  Tribune,  and  the  Nation. 
But  being  offered  the  assistant  editorship  of  the 
Atlaittic  Monthly,  he  removed  to  Boston. 

A  pleasant  summary  of  his  experience  as  a 
resident  of  Cambridge  is  found  in  his  book, 
Suburban  Sketches. 

He  began  his  career  as  a  novelist  in  1871, 
and  assumed  the  editorship  of  the  Atlantic  a 
year  later.  Since  then  his  works  have  suc- 
ceeded each  other  rapidly,  his  fame  growing 
steadily  from  year  to  year.  While  busy  with 
his  novels  he  has  found  time  to  produce  two 
volumes  of  verse,  which  include  his  earlier 
poems  and  those  written  since.  In  these  po- 
ems, many  of  which  show  the  finest  poetic  feel- 
ing, we  have  a  new  view  of  the  successful 
novelist.  Here  may  be  seen  his  early  suscepti- 
bility to  natural  scenes,  as  well  as  the  more 
emotional  side  of  his  character.  Some  of  these 
earlier  poems  are  full  of  that  reminiscent  charm 
in  which  the  hope,  the  ideahty,  and  the  un- 
accountable sadness  of  youth  shine  out  with 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  121 

tender  grace.  The  later  poems  also  are  replete 
with  that  susceptibility  to  feeling  and  impres- 
sions which  can  find  fit  expression  only  in 
verse.  All  his  poetry  may,  in  fact,  be  said  to 
be  transcriptions  of  those  moods  of  mind 
which  come  and  go  like  day-dreams,  and  which 
yet  show  the  author's  mind  in  a  clearer  and 

truer  light. 

Some  papers  on  Italian  literature,  the  con- 
duct of  the  Editor's  Study  in  Harper  s  Mag- 
azine,  and  other  miscellaneous  work  have  run 
side  by  side  with  the  preparation  of  Mr.  How- 
ells's  novels.  Out  of  the  numberless  stories 
told  for  the  amusement  of  his  children,  he  has 
collected  a  dozen  or  so  under  the  title  Christ- 
mas Every  Day  and  Other  Sto7^zes,  and  made 
a  most  charming  contribution  to  juvenile  lit- 
erature. 

Howells's  gift  above  all  others  is  to  take 
the  ordinary  occurrences  of  life  and  make 
them  interesting.  To  him  the  commonplace 
appeals  as  a  very  large  part  of  actual  life,  and 
he  has  found  his  inspiration  in  dealing  with 
mankind  at  large  rather  than  with  unusual  per- 


122  WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS 

sonalities  or  incidents.  His  theory  is  that 
character  and  experience  are  the  result  of 
growth,  and  of  that  slow  growth  which  is  built 
moment  by  moment  and  day  by  day.  Human 
life  thus  running  on  from  hour  to  hour  pre- 
sents to  him  a  picture  of  the  real  struggles, 
conquests,  or  defeats  of  the  soul  in  the  com- 
mon relations  of  life,  and  his  long  series  of 
novels  are  but  histories  of  the  battles  won  or 
lost  by  people  whose  experiences  are  never  ex- 
traordinary but  only  such  as  are  met  by  the 
larger  part  of  mankind.  To  him  those  rarer 
idealizations  which  appeal  to  the  genius  of 
Hawthorne  or  Poe  are  forced  out  of  sight  by 
the  actual  contact  with  the  many  thousands 
who  march  on  monotonously  day  after  day 
and  yet  whose  experience  sums  up  the  moral 
achievements  of  the  race. 

This  series  of  novels  began  with  the  publica- 
tion of  Their  Wedding  Journey  in  1871,  the 
success  of  which  determined  Howells's  career 
as  a  novelist.  This  delightful  little  ending  to 
an  old  love  story  was  followed  by  A  Chance 
Acqttainta7ice,  in  which  were  incorporated  some 


WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS  1 23 

charming  impressions  of  Canadian  travel. 
None  of  the  succeeding  works  has  been  cast 
in  quite  so  light  a  vein. 

Throughout  these  character  studies,  which 
now  number  many  volumes,  there  runs  the 
earnest  seriousness  of  the  man  who  is  in 
sympathy  with  the  aspiration,  and  yet  whose 
large  charity  can  make  him  easily  tolerate  the 
defects  of  mankind. 

Sometimes  the  novel  treats  of  the  experience 
of  an  individual  and  is  the  history  of  a  com- 
mercial success,  as  in  The  Rise  of  Silas  Lap- 
ham;  or  of  an  intellectual  struggle,  as  in  The 
Ministers  Charge ;  or  of  a  crime,  as  in  The 
Quality  of  Mercy ;  very  many  of  the  later 
works  deal  with  those  social  questions  which 
are  now  under  the  consideration  of  every  ear- 
nest thinker. 

In  his  y^  Traveller  from  Altruria  Ho  wells 
has  treated  one  of  these  questions  with  unspar- 
ing hand.  It  is  in  these  and  similar  books  that 
one  sees  the  Americanism  of  the  author  and  is 
made  to  feel  his  interest  in  the  highest  welfare 
of  his  native  land. 


124  WILLIAM   DEAN   HOWELLS 

Mr.  Ho  wells  has  in  The  Mouse  Trap  and 
Other  Farces  given  us  some  delightfully  hu- 
morous situations  treated  with  all  the  delicacy 
of  his  art.  In  his  Modern  Italian  Poets  he  has 
embodied  the  experience  of  twenty  years'  study 
of  a  century  of  Italian  poetry,  in  a  series  of  es- 
says showing  remarkable  appreciation  and  in- 
sight. Some  miscellaneous  work  in  lighter  vein 
shows  still  the  genial  fellowship  which  Howells 
always  establishes  between  himself  and  his  read- 
ers. With  the  exception  of  the  different  pe- 
riods passed  abroad,  Mr.  Howells  has  spent  his 
life  since  leaving  Ohio  in  Boston  and  New 
York,  in  which  latter  city  he  now  lives. 

The  generous  nature  of  the  man  is  shown  in 
his  wide  intercourse  with  his  fellow-men  in  all 
grades  of  social  life.  His  studies  of  human 
nature  reflect  always  his  own  point  of  view, 
from  which  he  sees  man  struggling  ever  with 
difficulties  and  discouragements,  yet  pressing 
patiently  on  toward  higher  levels. 


CHAPTER   IX 

FRANCES    HODGSON    BURNETT 
1849— 

In  the  year  1866,  a  little  girl  left  her  birth- 
place in  Manchester,  England,  and  came  to 
America  to  live.  Her  new  home  was  in  East- 
ern Tennessee,  and  thus  her  first  impressions  of 
America  were  connected  with  great  mountain 
ridges  reaching  up  to  the  sky,  miles  and  miles 
of  unbroken  forest,  and  an  unending  succes- 
sion of  wild  flowers  which  decked  wood  and 
stream  with  ever-changing  beauty.  These  sur- 
roundings made  the  child  supremely  happy, 
for  all  her  life  she  had  longed  for  great  out 
of  door  spaces  to  breathe  in,  great  trees  to  play 
under,  and  flowers  so  plentiful  that  one  could 
not  count  them ;  so  the  new  home  seemed 
enchanting. 

Manchester,  where  her  life  had  been  thereto- 
fore spent,  was  one  of  the  great  manufacturing 


126       FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT 

cities  of  England,  and  all  day  long  the  smoke 
from  the  tall  factory  chimneys  hung  over  it  and 
shut  out  the  sky,  while  the  streets  were  given 
up  mainly  to  the  dwellings  of  the  operatives, 
or  buildings  connected  with  the  commercial 
life  of  the  place.  Here  and  there,  however, 
were  pleasant  little  squares  and  streets,  where 
the  people  of  the  better  class  lived,  and  one 
of  these  squares  had  been  the  home  of  the 
child,  Frances  Hodgson,  who,  until  she  came 
to  America,  tried  very  hard  to  "  make  be- 
lieve "  that  the  trees  in  an  English  square 
represented  a  forest,  that  the  clouds  of  smoke 
were  real  clouds,  and  that  the  rose-bushes, 
lilacs,  and  snowdrops  of  the  garden  opened 
into  vistas  of  tropical  bloom. 

Many  years  after,  when  this  little  girl  had  be- 
come a  woman  and  had  children  of  her  own,  she 
wrote  a  book  in  which  she  put  many  pictures 
of  this  Manchester  life;  both  the  real  world 
and  the  dream  world,  in  which,  like  all  im- 
aginative children,  she  often  wandered.  And 
here  we  learn  that,  as  far  back  as  she  could 
remember,  she  was  given  to  making  up  stories 


FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT        \2^ 

— and,  with  the  assistance  of  her  dolls,  acting 
them  in  the  privacy  of  the  nursery — about 
everything  that  she  heard  or  read,  or  that  in 
any  way  touched  her  own  life. 

This  naturally  led  to  writing  the  stories 
down  as  soon  as  her  little  fingers  could  man- 
age it,  and  she  seems  to  have  had  a  very  droll 
time  in  trying  to  procure  the  paper  so  neces- 
sary for  the  work.  Old  exercise,  or  account 
books,  which  still  held  a  few  pages  untouched 
by  butchers'  and  grocers'  accounts,  were  her 
principal  resource,  and  it  was  in  one  of  these 
she  inscribed  her  first  poem  while  she  was  still 
such  a  little  child  that  even  the  memory  of 
what  it  was  about  soon  passed  away  from  her. 
Another  poem,  written  on  a  Sunday  evening 
when  the  family  were  at  church,  she  remem- 
bers better.  It  was  a  stormy  evening,  and  she 
started  out  to  write  a  sad  poem  about  loneli- 
ness, but  her  melancholy  gave  out  at  the  end 
of  the  first  stanza,  and  with  childish  adapta- 
bility she  forthwith  turned  it  into  a  funny 
poem.  It  had  enough  cleverness  to  attract 
some  praise  from  her  mother  upon  her  return 


128       FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT 

from  church,  which  so  delighted  the  young 
author  that  it  laid  a  little  seed  of  desire  to  do 
still  better  things  ;  it  is  possible  that  it  was 
this  very  little  seed  which  grew  and  bloomed 
at  last  into  some  very  beautiful  flowers  of 
literature.  At  any  rate,  from  this  time  the 
writing  of  stories  went  on  quite  indefatigably  ; 
whether  they  won  praise  or  blame  the  practice 
must  at  least  have  been  useful  in  developing  a 
power  for  sustained  effort  and  a  persistence 
under  difficulties,  for  outside  the  lack  of  paper 
there  was  also  the  harsh  and  biting  criticism 
of  two  brothers,  whose  souls  were  devoted  to 
cricket  and  who  thought  themselves  quite  ill- 
used  in  having  a  ''  romantic  "  sister. 

But  in  her  younger  sister,  Edith,  and  in  a  few 
schoolmates,  Frances  found  an  audience  which 
would  listen  with  delight  to  her  tales,  whether 
written  or  told,  from  day  to  day  in  the  intervals 
of  lessons.  It  is  probable  that  these  stories 
showed  little  if  any  literary  promise.  They  were 
in  the  main  tales  of  romantic  lovers  and  sweet- 
hearts, who  bore  a  suspicious  resemblance  to 
the  heroes  and  heroines  of  Scott,  Dickens,  and 


FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT        1 29 

the  novels  published  in  Blackwood's  Mag- 
azine;  but  their  composition  made  an  agree- 
able occupation  for  her  active  little  mind, 
and  rendered  her  happy,  and  this  was  a  great 
deal. 

After  their  removal  to  America,  which  was 
brought  about  by  the  desire  of  the  mother  to 
better  the  fortunes  of  her  fatherless  boys  and 
girls,  Frances  continued  her  story-telling  and 
story- writing,  having  still  the  sympathetic  sister 
as  auditor.  And  one  day  when  the  two  girls 
were  conjuring  plans  for  helping  the  family 
finances  it  suddenly  occurred  to  the  young 
author  to  write  a  story  and  submit  it  for  pub- 
lication. 

But  this  was  a  formidable  task,  for  Frances 
was  absolutely  sure  that  no  editor  would  accept 
a  story  not  written  on  foolscap  paper,  and  this 
she  neither  possessed  nor  had  the  means  of  get- 
ting. Where  could  she  obtain  the  money  to 
buy  this  paper  ?  The  sisters  pondered  and 
pondered  this  difficult  problem,  and  at  last  they 
hit  upon  a  joyful  solution.  Two  little  mulatto 
girls  whom    they  knew  were  making   money 


I30       FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT 

by  gathering  and  selling  the  wild  grapes  which 
grew  in  abundance  in  the  neighboring  woods. 
Negotiations  were  entered  upon  with  these 
children,  who  promised  to  sell  also  the  grapes 
which  Frances  and  her  sister  might  gather.  In 
this  way  money  was  obtained  for  the  foolscap 
paper,  and  as  that  had  been  the  most  difficult 
part  of  the  business  the  story  was  soon  dis- 
patched to  the  magazine,  with  a  modest  note  to 
the  editor  telling  him  that  the  author's  ''  object " 
was  *' remuneration." 

This  venture  was  not  entirely  successful,  the 
editor  of  the  magazine  being  willing  to  accept 
the  story  but  not  to  pay  for  it.  Frances  there- 
fore asked  for  it  back,  and  having  still  enough 
grape  money  left  to  purchase  the  needed 
stamps,  she  promptly  dispatched  it  to  another 
editor.  The  story  was  a  little  romance  of 
English  life,  some  of  its  scenes  having  actually 
been  written  while  the  author  still  lived  in 
Manchester,  and  the  new  editor  had  some 
doubts  as  to  its  originality.  He  therefore  laid 
a  little  trap  for  the  young  girl,  and  wrote  to 
say  he  would  reserve  judgment  until  he  could 


FRANCES   HODGSON  BURNETT  I3I 

see  another  story  from  the  same  hand.  Fran- 
ces replied  with  a  new  story  that  was  Ameri- 
can in  character,  and  this  versatility  seemed  to 
convince  the  editor  that  he  had  really  discov- 
ered a  new  story-writer ;  he  sent  thirty-five  dol- 
lars for  the  two  tales,  and  the  girl's  life  as  a  fully 
fledged  author  began. 

Other  stories  appeared  rapidly  during  the 
next  few  years,  and  the  reputation  thus  gained 
w^as  greatly  increased  by  the  publication  in  1872 
of  Surly  Tims  Trouble,  a  dialect  story.  A 
year  later  the  young  author  married  and  made 
a  trip  to  Europe.  Perhaps  the  home  of  her 
childhood  thus  revisited  brought  back  early 
scenes  with  new  force  ;  perhaps  the  memory  of 
them  had  always  lingered  in  the  impressionable 
heart,  at  any  rate  the  first  great  success  of  the 
author,  now  Frances  Hodgson  Burnett,  came 
with  the  publication  of  That  Lass  G  Lowries, 
a  story  of  Lancashire  life.  Years  before,  while 
still  a  little  girl  ''making  believe"  that  her  real 
world  was  all  that  her  dream  world  appeared, 
she  had  noticed,  with  a  child's  sharp  intuitions, 
a  certain  factory  girl  who  used  sometimes  to 


132  FRANCES   HODGSON   BURNETT 

wander  into  the  square,  and  who  somehow 
seemed  different  from  her  companions.  Al- 
though this  girl  was  never  "  made  into  a  story  " 
yet  her  personality  lingered  in  the  child's  con- 
sciousness, and  in  later  years  stepped  out  from 
the  land  of  shadowy  memories  and  became 
the  Joan  Lowrie  of  the  book.  She  was  changed 
from  a  millhand  to  a  collier's  daughter,  and  the 
scene  was  laid  in  one  of  the  English  coal  dis- 
tricts. It  was  the  love  story,  pure  and  sweet, 
of  this  uneducated  girl  of  the  mines  and  the 
young  overseer,  whose  position  both  as  regards 
birth  and  education  was  far  above  her  own. 
And  it  was  told  with  such  sympathy,  such 
directness  and  force,  that  it  appealed  to  its 
audience  as  a  real  story  of  actual  life.  The 
author  had  indeed  long  since  ceased  to  **  make 
up  stories."  Her  imagination  had  become  in- 
stead a  magic  lamp  revealing  to  her  the  possi- 
bilities and  experiences  of  the  lives  that  touched 
her  own.  Sometimes  a  little  glimpse  would 
suffice  to  show  her  what  lay  behind,  sometimes 
two  or  three  scenes  would  arrange  themselves 
so  vividly  as  to  indicate  the  whole  drama,  but 


FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT        1 33 

always  at  the  bottom  of  the  story  could  be  seen 
a  foundation  of  truth. 

In  That  Lass  G  Lowries  the  colliers  speak 
that  Lancashire  dialect  which  Mrs.  Burnett  had 
learned  surreptitiously  as  a  child,  either  by 
listening  to  the  factor)^  people  as  they  passed 
the  gates  of  the  square  in  which  she  lived,  or 
by  stolen  visits  to  their  homes  in  the  back 
streets.  The  dialect  and  its  idioms  had  a  fasci- 
nation for  her  ;  she  and  some  of  her  little 
friends  learned  it  with  much  greater  enthusi- 
asm than  they  devoted  to  their  French,  and 
when  no  one  was  listening  they  held  long  con- 
versations and  talked  as  the  ''back  street"  peo- 
ple talked.  It  was  an  accomplishment  that 
served  well  in  after  years,  and  Mrs.  Burnett's 
power  for  the  picturesque  reproduction  of 
scenes  unfamiliar  to  her  readers  is  no  doubt  due 
in  some  measure  to  her  self-training  of  ear  and 
eye  in  her  old  life  at  Manchester. 

Another  interesting  story  of  English  life  is 
HawortJis,  in  which  the  hero  is  one  of  those 
dreamers  of  dreams,  lucky  enough  to  realize  his 
ambitions.     One  or  two  of  the  characters  in 


134       FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT 

this  book  give  Mrs.  Burnett  an  opportunity 
to  indulge  in  that  delightful  sense  of  humor 
which  lights  nearly  all  her  work,  and  which 
shows  her  keenly  alive  to  the  comedy  of  life. 

Perhaps  her  touch  is  nowhere  more  faithful 
than  in  her  story  of  American  life,  Through 
One  Administration.  And  in  A  Fair  Bar- 
barian she  shows  an  equal  power  of  pictur- 
ing the  contrasts  of  American  and  English 
life. 

In  her  charming  juvenile  book,  Piccino, 
Mrs.  Burnett  tells  how  Little  Lord  Fatintle- 
roy,  her  first  phenomenally  successful  child's 
book,  **grew."  It  was  really  a  life  study 
of  her  own  little  boy,  whose  sweet  and  merry 
disposition,  thoughtful  sayings,  and  infantile 
wisdom  made  him  the  delight  of  the  house. 
His  odd  little  views  of  American  and  Eng- 
lish life  suggested  to  her  the  idea  of  a  story 
in  which  a  little  American  boy  should  be 
brought  into  contact  with  aristocratic  English 
life.  How  well  she  succeeded  is  evinced  by 
the  enormous  circulation  of  the  book,  which 
went  through  edition  after  edition,  and  by  its 


FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT        1 35 

adaptation  into  one  of  the  most  successful 
dramas  of  childhood. 

Giovanni  and  the  Others  is  in  itself  a  col- 
lection of  beautiful  stories  of  childhood,  with 
whose  dreams  and  hopes  Mrs.  Burnett  is 
always  in  such  loving  sympathy. 

An  ideal  child's  book  is  Sara  Crewe,  the 
story  of  a  little  orphan  girl  whose  miseries  are 
turned  to  joys  by  fairy  fortune.  This  small 
heroine  is  one  of  the  most  fascinating  of 
the  author's  productions.  She  is  so  real,  so 
pathetic,  so  much  a  simple,  ordinary  little  girl, 
perplexed  with  the  troubles  that  often  visit  the 
young,  yet  bearing  through  it  all  that  infinite 
child  faith  in  goodness  and  love. 

Little  St.  Elizabeth,  Piccino,  and  Two  Little 
Pilgrims  Progress  are  also  interpretations  of 
the  child  mind.  In  all  her  work  it  is  this  power 
of  sympathy  which  moves  her  to  the  highest  ef- 
forts of  her  art.  In  that  charming  autobiography 
of  her  childhood,  The  One  I  Knew  the  Best 
of  All,  the  reader  is  struck  by  this  note  of  sym- 
pathy which  sounds  in  her  earliest  recollections. 
Whether  at  play  in  the  garden,  or  perched  upon 


136  FRANCES   HODGSON   BURNETT 

the  shelf  of  the  old  ''  secretaire,"  reading  tales 
out  of  Blackwood,  or  listening  to  the  factory 
people  in  the  back  streets,  or  weaving  romances 
for  the  amusement  of  her  little  friends,  the  child 
was  always  for  the  moment  intensely  alive  to 
the  situations  she  had  created.  She  lived  thus 
in  many  worlds,  moved  among  many  scenes 
strange  to  her  own  experience,  and  learned 
early  that  one  of  the  best  things  in  life  is  to 
forget  one's  own  self  in  the  experiences  of 
others. 

This  power  of  self-forgetting,  this  art  of  wan- 
dering through  realms  of  thought  unknown  to 
actual  touch,  are  the  chief  factors  that  make 
Mrs.  Burnett's  productions  living  characters, 
whose  interests  fascinate,  and  whose  fortunes 
become  for  the  time  our  own. 

Mrs.  Burnett  calls  Washington  her  home, 
but  she  also  lives  much  abroad.  One  great 
sorrow  of  her  life  was  the  loss  of  her  son  Lio- 
nel, the  older  brother  of  Little  Lord  Fauntle- 
roy.  Perhaps  it  is  this  which  has  touched  some 
of  her  work  for  children  with  a  subtle  sadness. 
This  has  found  its  best  expression,  however, 


FRANCES  HODGSON  BURNETT       1 3/ 

in  the  desire  to  give  practical  aid  to  the  many 
boys  whose  fortunes  have  been  less  fair  than 
those  of  her  own  sons,  and  who  owe  much  to  her 
generous  sympathy  with  their  need.  It  is  a 
pleasant  thought  that  this  dark  shadow  should 
have  turned  into  the  sunshine  which  has  lighted 
many  young  lives  that  without  it  would  have 
been  shadowed  too. 


CHAPTER  X 

THE   SOUTHERN    STORY    WRITERS 

One  of  the  functions  of  literature  is  to  re- 
cord the  story  of  the  home  life  of  a  nation.  In 
the  United  States  this  life  has  developed  under 
very  varied  conditions,  and  the  stories  of  East, 
West,  and  South  all  differ  widely  from  one  an- 
other. New  England  society  was  made  up  of 
different  elements  from  those  which  composed 
that  of  the  Southern  plantation  or  the  Western 
mining  camp  ;  yet  the  picture  of  each  com- 
munity is  interesting  and  valuable. 

Among  the  most  interesting  of  these  stories 
of  social  conditions  are  those  relating  to  the 
South.  Here  many  different  pictures  are  pre- 
sented, and  American  literature  has  been  fortu- 
nate in  being  able  to  have  them  transcribed  at 
first  hand. 

This  has  been  done  by  the  men  and  women 


TKE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 39 

whose  memories  go  back  beyond  the  war,  and 
yet  who  were  still  young  when  the  South  be- 
gan that  great  effort  of  rebuilding,  which  has 
made  its  recent  history  one  of  such  splendid 
achievement.  These  stories  of  the  South  be- 
fore and  immediately  after  the  war  could  only 
have  been  written  by  Southerners.  Every 
word  and  incident,  every  scene  and  finished 
picture,  is  full  of  that  child  love  which  only  the 
native  born  can  feel  ;  the  same  love  which  sac- 
rificed all  in  the  dark  days  of  the  war,  and 
which  still  cherishes  with  passionate  devotion 
the  memory  of  the  past. 

Under  such  inspiration  the  literature  of  the 
new  South  comes  to  us  full  of  tender  meaning. 
Its  writers  give  to  us  the  recollections  that  are 
most  sacred  to  them,  and  we  have  in  them  not 
only  a  picture  of  Southern  life,  but  a  revelation 
of  the  heart.  All  the  broken,  childish  memo- 
ries of  plantation  songs,  folk-lore  tales,  and 
negro  superstitions  that  floated  in  the  mind  for 
years  are  here  crystallized  into  form,  and  make 
a  record  of  vital  and  enduring  value. 

Much  of  this  literature  has  been  thrown  into 


140  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

the  form  of  the  short  story,  and  among  the  most 
delightful  of  these  writers  is  Colonel  Richard 
Malcolm  Johnston,  the  historian  of  the  ''  crack- 
ers," or  poor  white  people  of  middle  Georgia. 
Colonel  Johnston  was  born  in  Hancock  County, 
Ga.,  in  1822.  His  father  was  a  large  planter, 
and  his  earliest  years  were  spent  upon  the  farm. 
This  life  differed  in  many  ways  from  the  usual 
life  of  the  plantations.  Usually  the  poor 
whites  of  the  South  were  looked  down  upon 
and  despised  because  of  their  ignorance,  pov- 
erty, and  shiftlessness.  But  in  the  regions  of 
middle  Georgia  the  conditions  were  different. 
The  poor  white  was  still  ignorant  and  shiftless, 
he  was  often  lazy,  and  he  was  never  very  suc- 
cessful, but  in  some  way  he  managed  to  make 
himself  respected.  The  life  of  the  planters 
here  was  very  simple.  Their  children  played 
with  those  of  their  poor  neighbors  and  negroes, 
and  in  this  happy  community  of  interests  young 
Richard  spent  the  most  impressionable  years 
of  his  life.  His  intimates  were  the  little  black 
and  white  children,  who,  though  different  in 
birth,  knew  as  well  as  he  the  secrets  of  wood 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  I4I 

and  stream.  With  them  he  set  traps,  fished, 
played  games,  went  to  mill,  and  shared  his  holi- 
day joys  and  presents.  When  some  wandering 
master  would  open  a  school  for  a  few  weeks  in 
the  neighborhood,  Richard  would  attend  hand 
in  hand  wnth  the  little  ''  crackers."  Together 
they  struggled  over  reading,  writing,  and  arith- 
metic, and  w^hen  the  teacher  was  surly  and  un- 
just, as  often  happened,  they  endured  together 
his  harshness  and  cruelty. 

In  this  atmosphere  the  boy  learned  to  know 
the  fine  elements  of  character  that  often  lay 
beneath  the  rough  exterior  of  his  poorer  neigh- 
bors ;  here  too  he  imbibed  that  sweet  and  broad 
humanity  which  breathes  through  all  his  work 
and  makes  it  seem  the  presentation  of  a  nat- 
ure exceptionally  noble. 

In  his  series  of  stories  called  The  Dukes- 
borough  Tales,  Colonel  Johnston  has  described 
one  of  those  country  temples  of  learning  so 
familiar  to  his  childhood.  The  Goose  Pond 
School  is  a  memory  of  one  of  those  ill-condi- 
tioned creatures  who,  under  the  pretence  of 
teaching,  made  miserable  the  lives  of  the  ten 


142  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

or  twenty  children  committed  to  their  charge. 
Happily  this  specimen  of  instructor  was  rare, 
even  in  Colonel  Johnston's  youth,  when  cor- 
poral punishment  was  thought  so  essential  to 
good  discipline.  This  story,  containing  so 
much  tenderness  and  sympathy,  is  a  revelation 
of  the  heart  of  the  boy  who  treasured  it  so 
many  years.  The  picture  of  the  little  hero 
struggling  with  injustice,  disgraced  in  the  sight 
of  his  mates,  and  yet  enduring  it  all  bravely 
for  the  sake  of  his  mother,  shines  out  in  the 
bright  lights  which  the  author  loves  to  throw 
upon  the  character  of  the  humble  "  cracker." 

Another  reminiscence  of  youth  is  found  in 
The  Early  Majority  of  Mr,  Thomas  Watts ^ 
the  scene  of  which  is  laid  in  Powelton,  whither 
Colonel  Johnston's  family  had  removed.  Pow- 
elton had  an  excellent  school  conducted  by  a 
staff  of  New  England  teachers.  Boys  and 
girls  sat  together  and  learned  the  same  lessons, 
and  Richard  Malcolm  Johnston  was  one  of 
the  most  promising  pupils,  and  began  here  the 
serious  study  for  that  ripe  scholarship  which 
he   attained.      The   types   of   character  which 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  I43 

abounded  in  Powelton  have  passed  into  litera- 
ture, The  Dukesborough  Tales  being  but  so 
many  transcriptions  of  the  different  personali- 
ties found  in  this  little  hamlet  of  one  hundred 
and  fifty  inhabitants.  It  is  evident  that  the 
boy  who  was  studying  mathematics  and  Latin 
so  diligently,  who  was  first  on  the  playground 
and  the  leader  of  all  boyish  escapades,  was  be- 
yond this  a  student  of  his  fellow-beings.  The 
Dickesboroiigh  Tales  could  only  have  been 
written  by  one  familiar  from  childhood  with 
the  originals.  For  beside  the  art  which  gives 
them  a  high  place  in  literary  composition,  they 
are  full  of  the  flavor  of  the  soil. 

From  Powelton  Johnston  went  to  college, 
and  after  he  was  graduated  studied  law.  For 
ten  years  he  practised  in  the  circuits  of  north- 
ern and  middle  Georgia,  travelling  from  court 
to  court,  much  in  the  same  way  that  the  cir- 
cuit preachers  of  the  West  discharged  their 
duties.  It  was  an  experience  full  of  charm  for 
the  young  lawyer  who  always  found  human 
nature  so  interesting.  Many  funny  incidents 
relieved   the   monotony   of   the  law   business, 


144  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY  WRITERS 

while  constant  companionship  with  the  coun- 
try people  made  a  valuable  study  for  their 
future  historian.  The  circuit  lawyer,  like  the 
circuit  rider,  has  now  passed  away ;  but  his 
picturesque  figure  is  preserved  in  the  records 
of  Colonel  Johnston's  memory,  and  his  like- 
ness, traced  amid  his  unique  surroundings,  has 
found  a  permanent  place  in  our  literature. 

In  1 85 1,  in  his  thirtieth  year,  Colonel  John- 
ston accepted  the  professorship  of  belles  lettres 
in  the  State  University  of  Maryland.  Four 
years  later  he  started  a  boys'  school  at  his 
plantation,  where  he  endeavored  to  put  in  prac- 
tice certain  ideas  which  he  held  of  broader  edu- 
cation. He  was  over  fifty  years  old  when  he 
began  writing  those  stories  of  Georgia  life 
which  have  made  him  one  of  the  leading  writers 
of  the  South. 

But  his  whole  life  had  been  really  an  education 
for  this  work.  He  had  had  a  soldier's  training 
in  the  field  of  fiction — the  practical  experience, 
and  the  hand  to  hand  touch  with  the  life  he 
described.  All  his  characters  are  genuine.  He 
lived  with  them  as  boy  and  man,  and  he  knew 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY  WRITERS  145 

their  hearts  as  only  such  a  close  compan- 
ion could.  This  absolute  fidelity  to  nature, 
combined  with  the  finest  artistic  perception, 
makes  of  these  stories  genre  pictures  of  rare 
value.  They  are,  moreover,  touched  by  that 
homely  love  which  shows  the  artist  native 
born. 

Almost  with  the  first  presentation  of  this 
life  Colonel  Johnston  became  famous.  His 
stories  succeeded  each  other  rapidly,  and  the 
several  collections  of  them  have  an  assured 
place.  The  Dukesborough  Tales ;  Mr,  Absa- 
lom Billmgsbee  aiid  Other  Georgia  Folk  ; 
Two  Gray  Tourists,  and  others  of  the  series 
alike  illustrate  the  author's  happy  gift  for 
producing  unique  and  picturesque  character 
studies. 

Besides  his  work  in  fiction.  Colonel  John- 
ston has  written,  in  conjunction  with  a  friend, 
a  history  of  English  literature ;  he  is  also  the 
author  of  a  life  of  Alexander  Stephens,  a  biog- 
raphy of  great  value.  His  genial  personality 
pervades  all  his  work,  and  makes  the  kindly 
humor,  the  generous  heartiness,  and  the  exqui- 


146  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

site  sympathy  but  a  reflection  of  his  own  rare 
nature. 

Among  the  children  who  walked  the  streets 
of  New  Orleans  immediately  after  the  war, 
and  noted  the  changes  that  were  rapidly  trans- 
forming the  old  city,  was  one  bright-eyed  girl 
who  was  destined  to  become  one  of  its  most 
interesting  historians.  Born  of  mixed  Irish 
and  Southern  blood,  she  had  inherited  from 
both  races  the  qualities  that  go  to  make  up 
the  story-teller.  The  everyday,  yet  constantly 
changing  scenes  of  her  childhood  were  pict- 
uresque and  wonderfully  interesting,  for  New 
Orleans,  above  all  others,  was  the  city  of  con- 
trasts. 

In  the  French  quarters  still  dwelt  the  aris- 
tocratic Creole  families,  descendants  of  the 
original  settlers,  who  had  retained  for  genera- 
tions the  traditions  of  the  French  race.  In 
the  business  portion  could  be  seen  the  typical 
Irish  and  Yankee  face  mingling  with  the 
Southern  American.  Along  the  wharves  and 
in  the    market  the  Italian   emigrants  vended 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  I47 

their  wares,  and  everywhere  swarmed  the 
negro,  the  birthright  of  the  old  city,  since  the 
beginning  of  slavery. 

Long  after  the  girl  had  reached  woman- 
hood, the  recollections  of  home  and  street  and 
school  still  remained  vivid,  and  ever  more  and 
more  they  began  to  weave  stories  in  her  mind. 
At  first  she  was  hardly  conscious  of  this,  it 
seemed  so  much  like  the  old  pictures  of  her 
childhood  which  had  come  and  gone  at  will ; 
but  by  and  by  the  characters  in  the  stories  be- 
gan to  say  and  do  things  quite  independently, 
as  if  they  w^ere  real  people,  and  at  last,  because 
they  seemed  to  insist  upon  it,  they  were  written 
down. 

They  were  none  of  them  exactly  true  stories, 
being  nearly  all  made  up  of  different  scenes 
fitted  in  together,  but  they  were  exact  pictures 
of  the  life  of  New  Orleans  as  the  author  had 
seen  it,  and  in  this  they  had  a  value  all  their 
own. 

Lying  close  beside  these  impressions  were 
others  of  maturer  years,  spent  in  the  country 
districts  of  Arkansas,  among  those  village  types 


148  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

which  are  as  curious  and  interesting  in  their 
way  as  the  typical  New  England  villagers. 
And  presently,  these  unique  personalities 
stepped  out  from  the  shadowy  fields  of  mem- 
ory, and  also  began  weaving  stories  about 
themselves.  As  in  the  case  of  the  others, 
they  were  not  exactly  true  stories,  yet  they 
were  all  things  that  actually  happened,  or 
might  have  happened,  in  the  lives  of  the  Ar- 
kansas country  folk,  and  they  verified  the  old 
adage  that  no  life  can  really  be,  or  seem  to  be, 
humdrum,  if  but  the  proper  observer  appears 
to  record  it. 

It  was  inevitable  that  these  stories  should 
also  be  written  down,  and  gradually  they 
began  to  appear  in  the  different  periodicals. 
They  were  well  liked,  and  by  the  time  they 
had  grown  into  bulk  for  a  volume,  their  au- 
thor, Mrs.  Ruth  McEnery  Stuart,  had  won  a 
name  as  one  of  the  most  interesting  local  his- 
torians of  the  South. 

The  stories  which  deal  with  the  street 
scenes  of  New^  Orleans  and  with  old  plan- 
tation   life  are   full    of  color  and  picturesque 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 49 

effect,  and  they  are  all  vividly  true  to 
life. 

Whether  Mrs.  Stuart  is  describing  an  Ital- 
ian fruit  vender's  booth,  as  in  Camelia  Riccardo, 
or  the  little  bare  hut  of  an  old  negro,  as  in 
Dukes  Christmas^  each  touch  is  faithful  to  the 
life  ;  there  is,  moreover,  in  the  tales  of  negro 
life  that  same  subtle  blending  of  humor  and 
pathos  which  characterizes  the  race  itself,  and 
makes  of  the  little  sketches  genuine  life  history. 

A  Golde7i  Weddmg,  a  story  of  a  man  and 
his  wife  who  were  separated  before  the  war 
and  only  re-united  in  old  age,  is  one  of  those 
pathetic  memories  of  slavery  transcribed  with 
a  loving  sympathy  which  wins  the  heart,  while 
the  author  is  equally  ready  to  enter  into  a  rela- 
tion of  the  violent  flirtations  of  the  Widder 
Johnsing  or  the  desperate  courtship  oijessekiah 
Brown.  Not  the  least  valuable  thing  about 
these  stories  is  their  reminiscent  suggestion  of 
many  phases  of  negro  life  that  must  inevitably 
soon  pass  away.  The  bits  of  local  color,  the 
poetic  yet  crude  imagination,  the  careless  jollity 
and  the  childlike  abandon  of  spirits  all  belong 


I50  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

to  the  negro  as  he  was  before  the  war,  when 
he  was  an  irresponsible,  fun-loving,  yet  often 
pathetic  figure.  With  responsibility,  educa- 
tion, and  the  dignity  of  freedom,  the  old  life 
must  at  last  pass,  and  it  has  been  a  task  full 
of  rich  result  to  thus  preserve  the  old  planta- 
tion traditions  of  this  picturesque  race. 

In  her  delineations  of  Arkansas  country  life 
Mrs.  Stuart  is  equally  happy.  Perhaps  she 
reaches  the  highest  point  in  her  work  in  The 
Woma7is  Exchange  of  Simpkinsville,  wiierein 
is  told  with  tender  reverence  the  story  of  a 
man  who  devoted  his  life  to  science,  never 
dreamed  of  fame,  who  died  unknown,  and  yet 
who  left  behind  him  a  finished  work  so  beau- 
tiful in  scope  that  it  placed  his  name  high  in 
the  list  of  those  who  labor  for  the  world's  good. 
Btcd  Ztcndfs  Mail,  and  Chnstnias  Geese  must 
also  be  reckoned  among  the  best  of  these  stories 
of  Arkansas  life. 

In  her  stories  of  negro  life  Mrs.  Stuart's  work 
has  a  distinctive  note  not  found  in  that  of  any 
other  Southern  writer.  The  picture  is  always 
taken  from  the  negro's  point  of  view,  and  thus 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  151 

reflects  many  interesting  side  lights.  The  pathos 
and  humor,  tragedy  and  childhke  lighthearted- 
ness  are  always  presented  in  natural  proportions 
in  these  sketches  of  the  experiences  of  the 
race  whose  history  has  been  so  unique,  and 
shining  through  them  all  is  ever  seen  that  sub- 
tle sympathy  with  the  situation  which  is  the 
mark  of  the  Southern  blood.  The  chronicler  is 
always  the  foster  child  of  the  cabin  who  brings 
her  gift  of  art  and  lays  it  with  loving  grace 
into  the  black  hands  w^hose  tender  ministry 
formed  her  earliest  recollection. 

Mrs.  Stuart's  third  book,  Babette,  is  the 
story  of  a  little  Creole  girl  who  was  stolen 
from  her  parents  and  who  grew  to  womanhood 
before  she  was  restored  to  her  family.  This 
little  story  contains  many  charming  features 
necessarily  absent  from  Mrs.  Stuart's  other 
work.  The  description  of  the  Mardi  Gras, 
and  of  the  miserable  Italian  settlement  where 
Babette  lived  with  the  old  woman  w^ho  stole 
her,  the  little  pictures  of  Creole  family  life,  and 
the  local  setting,  are  all  vivid  reproductions 
of  the  scenes  familiar  to  the  New  Orleans  of 


152  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

the  author's  youth.  Of  less  artistic  value  than 
the  other  work,  the  romance  of  Babette  is  yet 
warm  with  the  colors  of  youth,  pluck,  and  fine 
ambition. 

Among  her  other  juvenile  w^ork,  Solomoji 
Crows  Christmas  Pocket,  a  Christmas  tale 
with  a  picturesque  little  negro  for  the  hero,  will 
always  hold  a  high  place.  Lady  Quae ke Una, 
the  history  of  a  duck  whose  eggs  were  ex- 
changed, and  who,  to  her  great  consternation, 
hatched  out  twenty  small  guineas,  is  another  of 
this  author's  happy  conceits. 

Quackelina  had  the  good  fortune,  however, 
to  have  her  legitimate  children  restored  to  her, 
as  they  were  wandering  away  from  their  foster- 
mother,  the  guinea-hen.  The  little  odd  turns 
of  thought  peculiar  to  ducks  and  guinea-hens 
are  here  translated  by  Mrs.  Stuart  with  the 
felicity  that  shows  her  facile  talent  at  its  best. 

The  Two  Tims,  another  Christmas  story,  is 
full  of  that  subtle  pathos  which  clings  to  all 
her  studies  of  negro  character.  Old  Tim,  the 
grandfather,  is  rich  in  the  possession  of  a  banjo 
that  was  "  born  white  "  and  had  been  played  on 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 53 

with  '*  note  music"  by  its  former  master.  The 
relation  of  how  old  Tim  came  to  share  this 
priceless  treasure  with  young  Tim  makes  up 
the  story,  which  is  one  of  the  sweetest  and 
tenderest  to  be  found  in  the  author's  work. 

Other  stories  of  children,  some  miscellaneous 
matter  that  has  appeared  in  periodicals,  and 
several  delicate,  beautiful  studies  of  Arkansas 
folk-life,  comprise  the  rest  of  Mrs.  Stuart's  con- 
tribution to  literature,  while  her  pen  is  still 
busy  with  the  preparation  of  other  work. 

No  one  can  tell  just  when  that  delightful 
relative.  Brer  Rabbit,  entered  upon  the  career 
which  has  made  him  famous.  It  is  more  than 
probable  that  under  different  aliases  he  figured 
in  the  household  life  of  nations  so  old  that  they 
might  be  styled  the  great-great  or  even  fairy 
grandmothers  of  the  American  Union.  Of  this 
we  are  not  quite  sure.  But  we  know  that  the 
African,  to  whose  simple  mind  the  whole  ani- 
mal creation  seemed  big  and  little  brothers, 
guarded  Brer  Rabbit's  claims  with  loving  fidel- 
ity.    They  enshrined  his  deeds  in  their  unwrit- 


154  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY    WRITERS 

ten  history,  and  when  the  days  of  slavery  began 
they  brought  him  with  them  across  the  sea  and 
gave  him  a  place  of  honor  in  their  humble 
cabins.  Here  for  generations  the  story  of  his 
adventures  delighted  the  children  of  the  South, 
and  we  can  never  be  sufficiently  grateful  to 
Joel  Chandler  Harris  for  giving  it  literary  form. 

This  prince  of  biographers  learned  the  story 
of  his  hero  from  the  lips  of  the  old  colored 
uncles  and  mammies  who  were  the  historians 
of  the  plantation.  Learned  scholars  have  since 
that  time  tried  to  find  the  sources  of  this  curi- 
ous history,  but  they  have  not  been  very  suc- 
cessful. They  only  know  that  through  the 
changes  of  centuries,  during  which  time  the 
African  lost  his  nationality  and  language,  he 
has  kept  these  legends  and  superstitions  in  his 
heart. 

These  folk-lore  tales  which  thus  cling  to  the 
mind  of  a  race  are  as  much  a  part  of  it  as  its 
physical  characteristics ;  they  are  often  the 
only  records  of  its  early  history,  and  as  they 
drift  down  the  stream  of  time  they  become 
valuable   mementoes    of    the    far-off   days   of 


THE   SOUTHERN  STORY   WRITERS  1 55 

a  people's  beginning.  The  American  slave 
guarded  the  legend  which  was  still  cherished 
by  his  brother  in  Africa,  but  the  memory  of 
its  meaning  had  long  since  faded  from  his 
mind.  But  Mr.  Harris,  by  collecting  these 
stories,  has  still  done  valuable  work  for  the 
scholar,  while  to  literature  he  has  added  new 
treasures. 

Joel  Chandler  Harris,  like  Colonel  John- 
ston, is  a  native  of  Georgia.  He  was  born  at 
Eatonton  in  1 848,  and  as  a  very  young  child 
he  confesses  to  a  desperate  ambition  to  write 
something  that  might  appear  in  print.  This 
innocent  desire  he  expressed  so  freely  that  his 
fellow-townspeople  could  not  help  becoming 
interested  in  its  fulfilment.  A  boy  who 
wished  to  write  was  a  phenomenon  in  Eaton- 
ton,  where  the  juvenile  mind  inclined  to  less 
ambitious  pleasures,  and  young  Harris  was 
looked  at  by  his  associates  very  much  as  they 
would  have  regarded  an  Arctic  traveller,  or  a 
visitor  from  Japan.  Still  he  was  a  genuine 
boy,  and  outside  of  his  inclination  toward  litera- 
ture, his  companions  had  no  cause  to  distrust 


156  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

the  ambition  which  was  as  distinctly  toward 
fun  as  they  could  desire.  Harris  was  the 
leader  in  boyish  escapades  and  adventures,  and 
none  the  less  a  true  leader  because  his  mind 
sometimes  took  flights  far  beyond  the  horizon 
of  daily  life. 

His  wish  to  write  was  fostered  by  a  little 
incident  which  thrilled  his  soul  with  delight. 
A  '*  real  editor,"  who  had  learned  somehow  of 
the  boy's  aspirations,  gravely  presented  him 
one  day  with  a  copy  of  his  paper.  Harris  felt 
as  if  he  had  received  his  commission,  and  what 
romance  of  the  future  he  wove  around  this 
trifling  circumstance  only  the  imagination 
of  boyhood  can  understand. 

When  he  was  fourteen  life  seemed  to  shape 
itself  toward  the  attainment  of  his  desire.  A 
paper  called  The  Countryman  was  started  on 
the  Turner  plantation,  near  his  home,  and  an 
apprentice  to  learn  printing  was  desired. 
Harris  saw  the  advertisement,  and  flew  to 
the  office,  where  his  eagerness  and  his  un- 
qualified promise  to  devote  himself  to  the 
work  secured  him  the  engagement. 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 57 

Now  began  an  ideal  existence  for  the  boy, 
who  by  this  time  had  grown  into  a  student. 
Books  were  rare  in  the  Harris  home,  but  at 
the  Turner  plantation  there  was  a  valuable  pri- 
vate library,  and  to  this  the  young  apprentice 
had  free  access.  He  read  like  one  who  w^as 
reading  for  a  prize ;  and  in  this  flight  into 
the  intellectual  world  it  seemed  that  his  spirit 
was  finding  its  true  element.  His  childish 
ambition  to  write  something  for  print  now 
appeared  to  him  to  have  a  meaning ;  it  was 
with  joy  that  he  applied  himself  to  the  practi- 
cal details  of  his  work,  feeling  it  a  means  to  a 
higher  end. 

The  printing  office  was  in  the  woods,  where 
came  many  uninvited  visitors  with  tempting 
off"ers  of  recreation.  Blue  jays  swung  in  the 
trees  and  scoffed  at  work  ;  woodpeckers  ham- 
mered upon  the  roof ;  squirrels  played  upon 
the  window-sill  and  pretended  that  the  gather- 
ing of  winter  stores  was  no  part  of  their  exist- 
ence. What  boy  could  withstand  such  temp- 
tations ?  Harris  could  not.  He  was  in  the 
main  a  faithful  apprentice,  but  many  an  hour 


158  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

was  spent  in  the  wood  haunts  of  these  wild 
children  of  the  forest.  Here  he  learned  wood 
lore  and  became  skilled  in  the  interpretation 
of  bird  song  and  squirrel  chatter ;  here  it 
seems  he  must  have  become  familiar  with 
those  fascinating,  human-like  traits  of  animal 
character  which  he  has  transcribed  so  faith- 
fully in  his  work. 

This  shows  that  he  was  a  student  of  other 
things  than  books,  and  presently  his  mind  took 
another  and  still  wider  outlook.  He  associated 
much  with  the  country  people  who  lived  in  the 
neighborhood,  and  very  often  accompanied 
them  in  fishing  trips  and  hunting  expeditions 
to  the  mountains.  Without  knowing  it  he 
now  became  a  student  of  human  nature,  and 
thus  gained  the  knowledge  that  could  best  fit 
him  for  a  literary  career.  The  picturesque  side 
of  this  life  appealed  to  him  as  well  as  the 
deeper  meaning  which  lay  beneath  its  com- 
monplace ambitions  and  struggles ;  no  phase 
of  it  seemed  uninteresting,  and  the  insight  and 
experience  so  acquired  became  potent  factors 
in  his  education.     Study  from  books  still  went 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 59 

on ;  by  the  light  of  his  knot-wood  fire  he 
spent  long  hours  over  history,  biography,  and 
poetry.  The  widest  knowledge  forms  the  best 
training  for  the  specialist,  and  unconsciously 
Harris  was  receiving  that  liberal  education 
which  makes  his  Uncle  Renitts  Stories  such 
minute  and  faithful  revelations  of  animal  char- 
acter that  it  seems  Brer  Rabbit  himself  must 
have  been  the  scribe. 

The  war  put  an  end  to  this  happy  existence. 
The  Turner  plantation  lay  along  the  route  of 
Sherman's  march  to  the  sea,  and  the  printing- 
office  went  out  of  existence.  Harris,  however, 
kept  firm  hold  of  his  purpose,  and  almost  im- 
mediately after  the  close  of  the  war  entered  the 
office  of  the  Savan7tah  News  as  associate  edi- 
tor. He  had  determined  to  devote  himself  to 
newspaper  work,  and  for  this  he  trained  himself 
as  thoroughly  as  opportunity  offered.  It  was 
characteristic  of  his  mind  that  his  chosen  call- 
ing should  seem  an  end  in  itself  and  not  merely 
an  introduction  to  the  literary  life.  His  editor- 
ial work  was  from  the  beginning  conscientious 
and  scholarly.     It  was  the  outcome  of  a  brain 


l6o  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY  WRITERS 

which  saw  clearly  the  accomplishment  that 
might  lie  in  this  field,  and  from  first  to  last  it 
thrills  with  the  fine  purpose  and  masterful  en- 
ergy of  the  ideal  newspaper  editor. 

After  he  had  become  editor  of  the  Atlanta 
Constitution,  Harris  conceived  one  day  the 
idea  of  transcribing  one  or  two  of  those  folk- 
lore stories  which  he  had  heard  so  frequently 
from  the  lips  of  the  negroes.  The  result  took 
the  form  of  the  first  two  of  the  U7icle  Remus 
Stories,  and  as  an  experiment  he  printed  them 
in  his  paper.  The  reception  they  met  sur- 
prised him.  Uncle  Remus  seemed  at  once  to 
step  into  the  place  which  the  ages  had  pre- 
pared for  him.  His  chronicle,  like  other  long- 
neglected  fragments  of  old-world  lore,  had 
been  drawn  at  last  into  the  great  stream  of 
literature,  and  had  become  history.  Scholars 
recognized  the  value  of  this  new  gift  to  folk- 
lore literature,  and  welcomed  each  succeeding 
story  with  delight,  while  the  popular  taste 
made  of  Uncle  Remus  a  favorite  hero. 

By  the  time  the  stories  had  grown  into  a 
volume,   critic  and    laymen    alike   appreciated 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  l6l 

the  debt  that  American  literature  owes  the 
South  for  the  preservation  of  these  charming 
legends.  Mr.  Harris's  gift  as  a  writer  has 
made  of  these  stories  almost  perfect  pieces  of 
art.  The  skill  with  which  he  effaces  himself, 
and  makes  Uncle  Remus  the  real  narrator  is 
marvellous.  This  old  time,  consequential,  but 
delightful  product  of  plantation  life,  dominates 
the  series,  and  relates  the  adventures  of  Brer 
Rabbit  with  all  the  respect  of  the  genuine 
historian  for  a  favorite  character.  Interwoven 
with  the  legends  are  those  innumerable  reflec- 
tions of  the  negro  character  which  show  their 
jollity  and  homely  wisdom  in  the  most  charm- 
ing light.  We  might  have  learned  from  some 
other  source  w^hy  the  guinea  -  fowls  are 
speckled,  but  only  Uncle  Remus  himself 
could  have  woven  into  the  narrative  those 
threads  of  shining  recollection  which  show  the 
very  warp  and  woof  of  the  authors  brain. 
Brother  Foxs  Fish  Trap  ;  The  Moon  in  the 
Mill  Pond ;  and  Why  Mr.  Possum  Loves 
Peace,  are  other   expressions  of  the  African's 

appreciation  of  the  animal  cunning  which  he 
II 


l62  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

himself  largely  possesses.  Equally  full  of  the 
personal  element  is  the  delightful  Story  of  the 
Little  Rabbits,  an  irresistible  appeal  to  the 
child-mind,  which  sees  in  all  young  things  a 
likeness  to  itself.  Mr.  Rabbit  and  Mr,  Bear, 
and  How  Brer  Rabbit  Found  His  Match  at 
Last,  are  among  the  most  fascinating  advent- 
ures of  our  hero,  who  retains  his  place  in  the 
reader  s  heart  even  though  overmastered  by 
cunning  greater  than  his  own. 

These  stories  have  all  now  been  successfully 
produced  in  book  form.  Mr.  Harris  consid- 
ered their  preparation  as  incidental,  and  em- 
phatically pronounces  his  work  to  be  that  of 
journalism.  But  he  has  created  an  artistic  suc- 
cess that  our  literature  could  not  well  spare. 

The  personal  history  of  F.  Hopkinson 
Smith,  one  of  the  most  popular  of  Southern 
writers,  is  the  story  of  pluck.  Long  before 
he  ever  thought  of  writing  he  had  laid  his  life 
out  on  other  lines,  and  had  wrested  success 
out  of  many  disheartenments.  Mr.  Smith 
says  that  the  secret  of  his  success  in  painting, 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  163 

writing,  and  civil  engineering,  is  the  result  of 
the  severe  application  of  his  motto — work, 
work,  work,  and  that  indomitable  persever- 
ance has  alone  made  accomplishment  possible. 
He  was  born  in  Baltimore,  in  1838,  of  an 
old  Virginia  family,  and  his  early  years  were 
spent  in  that  atmosphere  of  refinement  and 
good  living  which  obtained  in  the  Southern 
home.  He  was  an  active  boy,  fond  of  fun, 
and  a  leader  in  the  amusements  which  cheered 
the  open-hearted  hospitality  of  the  family  life. 
The  old-fashioned  house  was  dominated  by 
the  spirit  of  his  mother,  a  remarkable  woman, 
to  whom  everybody  turned  for  advice,  and 
who  was  called  ''the  oracle"  by  relatives  and 
friends  alike.  The  mother  and  son  were  com- 
panions and  comrades,  in  the  fine  sense  of  the 
word.  To  her  he  turned  for  sympathy  in  his 
boyish  interests,  and  it  was  her  beneficent  in- 
fluence which  shaped  the  ambitions  of  his  man- 
hood. He  took  lessons  in  drawing  from  an 
old  artist,  giving  up  his  Saturday  holidays  to 
learning  the  secrets  of  the  art  he  loved  so  well. 
Drawing,  reading,  and  study,  however,  all  gave 


l64  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

place  occasionally  to  pure  fun,  when  he  would 
play  practical  jokes  upon  the  old-time  watch- 
men who  had  charge  of  the  Baltimore  streets, 
or  lead  his  companions  in  the  mischievous 
escapades  which  originated  in  his  own  fertile 
brain. 

Hopkinson  was  prepared  for  Princeton  Col- 
lege by  the  time  he  was  sixteen,  but  a  change 
in  the  family  fortunes  made  it  necessary  for 
him  to  abandon  a  college  career  and  he  entered 
a  hardware  store  as  a  shipping  clerk,  at  a  salary 
of  one  dollar  a  week.  After  various  experi- 
ences in  business  life  Mr.  Smith  became  a  con- 
tractor, and  furnished  material  for  the  con- 
struction of  government  buildings  along  the 
coast.  And  not  very  long  after  he  became  a 
civil  engineer.  Mr.  Smith  did  not  take  a 
course  at  any  school  of  technology  to  fit  him 
for  his  new  duties.  His  art  was  entirely  self- 
taught,  but  he  had  a  background  of  practical 
experience  that  made  invaluable  training. 

His  first  work  in  his  new  profession  was  to 
build  a  stone  ice-breaker  around  the  light-house 
at  Bridgeport,  Conn.     Since  then   Mr.  Smith 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 65 

has  built  light  -  houses,  sea-walls,  life-saving 
stations,  and  other  government  coast  buildings, 
his  field  of  work  ranging  from  end  to  end  of 
the  Atlantic  seaboard.  The  work  of  which  he 
is  most  proud  is  the  Race  Rock  Light-house 
off  New  London.  He  was  six  years  in  build- 
ing this  light-house,  the  situation  being  so  diffi- 
cult to  conquer  that  more  than  once  it  seemed 
that  it  must  be  abandoned.  The  foundation 
had  to  be  laid  far  beneath  the  waves,  and  often 
storm  and  sea  combined  to  undo  the  patient 
efforts  of  months.  Mr.  Smith  almost  lived  on 
the  rock  with  his  men,  and  when  a  terrific 
storm  would  arise  and  the  structure  was  in 
danger  he  only  became  more  resolute,  though 
he  knew  the  work  of  a  whole  year  might  be 
swept  away  in  a  single  night.  He  says  that 
the  Race  Rock  Light-house  made  him  ;  out  of 
this  effort  had  come  a  faith  in  the  power  of 
persistent  effort  which  nothing  could  ever  ef- 
face. One  of  Mr.  Smith's  most  interesting 
pieces  of  engineering,  was  the  laying  of  the 
foundation  of  the  statue  of  Liberty  enlighten- 
ing the  world  in  New  York  Harbor, 


l66  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

During  these  busy  years  of  active,  practical 
out-of-door  life  Mr.  Smith  was  busy  at  spare 
moments  with  pencil  and  brush.  Gradually 
he  won  for  himself  a  reputation  for  his  water- 
color  drawings,  and  for  fifteen  years  he  spent 
every  August  in  the  White  Mountains  study- 
ing from  nature.  Travel  in  the  West  Indies, 
Mexico,  and  Europe,  completed  his  education 
for  the  life  of  the  artist.  Of  late  years  he  has 
spent  nearly  every  summer  in  Venice,  whose 
picturesque  beauty  he  has  reproduced  over  and 
over  again  with  faithful  touch. 

His  literary  life  is  an  outgrowth  of  his  work 
as  an  artist.  During  the  publication  of  a  re- 
production in  book  form  of  a  series  of  his 
water-color  drawings  the  publisher  wrote  and 
asked  Mr.  Smith  if  he  could  not  supply  some 
brief  descriptions  of  the  points  illustrated. 
In  compliance  with  this  request  the  artist  wrote 
the  sketch  T/ie  Church  of  San  Pablo ;  which 
formed  the  initial  number  of  the  series  of  in- 
teresting sketches  published  under  the  title 
Well-worn  Roads,  the  author's  first  book. 
During  the  ten  years  following  its  appearance, 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  167 

Mr.  Smith  has  won  an  honest  fame  for  artistic 
literary  production.  Much  of  his  work  has 
been  descriptive  of  the  places  which  he  has  vis- 
ited, but  in  the  domain  of  fiction  he  has  also 
been  a  successful  adventurer.  True  to  the  in- 
stinct of  the  Southern  writer,  Mr.  Smith  has 
given  us  as  his  masterpiece  one  of  those  rare 
pictures  which  illustrate  life  in  the  South. 
From  memory  and  experience  he  gathered  the 
elements  which  made  up  the  character  of  a 
Southern  gentleman  of  the  old  school,  and  pre- 
sented, in  Colonel  Carder  of  CartersTjille,  a  pict- 
ure so  faithful  that  it  is  worthy  of  rank  as  a 
family  portrait.  The  motive  of  the  story  re- 
volves around  the  continual  difficulties  which 
beset  the  old  gentleman  because  he  cannot  re- 
member that  what  is  bought  must  be  paid  for. 
The  book  abounds  in  graceful  and  humorous 
situations,  and  the  character  of  Colonel  Carter, 
always  honorable  and  high  minded,  shines 
luminous  to  the  end.  The  success  of  the  book 
led  to  its  dramatization  ;  and  its  success  as  a 
piece  of  artistic  light  comedy  has  abundantly 
illustrated  its  dramatic  possibilities. 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 


Mr.  Smith  has  not,  however,  confined  him- 
self to  the  representation  of  Southern  life. 
Tom  Gi^ogan,  next  to  Colonel  Carter,  his  most 
important  w^ork,  is  a  spirited  and  valuable  piece 
of  portraiture,  whose  original  was  found  among 
the  force  employed  in  building  the  sea-wall 
around  Governor's  Island.  Here,  among  his 
gang  of  laborers,  the  author  found  the  cheer- 
ful, capable  Irishwoman  who  is  the  heroine  of 
the  book.  The  story  is  full  of  the  sympathy 
with  human  nature  which  Mr.  Smith's  expe- 
rience as  a  leader  and  director  of  other  men's 
actions  has  so  largely  developed. 

Like  Joel  Chandler  Harris,  Mr.  Smith  con 
siders  his  literary  career  as  almost  incidental 
He  says  that  he  is  a  civil  engineer,  who  is 
lucky  enough  to  find  time  to  devote  to  litera- 
ture and  painting.  But  the  character  of  his 
work  shows  the  temper  of  the  true  artist,  who 
serves  art  for  its  own  sake,  and  who  is  willing  to 
bring  to  the  service  his  most  earnest  devotion. 

No  part  of  the  South  shows  more  interest- 
ing social   conditions   than  the  region  of  the 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  169 

Tennessee  Mountains.  Here,  where  for  so 
many  years  the  settlers  were  remote  from  the 
rest  of  the  world,  they  developed  tastes  and  in- 
terests widely  different  from  those  of  Southern 
city  and  plantation  life. 

The  daily  life  of  these  people  was  simple  in 
the  extreme.  While  the  East  was  building 
great  manufacturing  and  commercial  interests, 
the  South  developing  the  luxurious  life  of  the 
plantation,  and  the  West  pouring  its  resistless 
energy  into  the  mining  of  gold  and  silver,  the 
dwellers  of  the  Tennessee  Mountains  still  kept 
to  the  primitive  habits  of  early  frontier  life. 
The  men  hunted,  fished,  and  tilled  the  soil  only 
as  strict  necessity  required.  The  women  wove 
and  spun,  the  mothers  and  daughters  perform- 
ing all  the  household  duties.  The  girls  were 
taught  only  the  simplest  home  tasks,  while 
each  boy  was  trained  into  such  a  knowledge 
of  wood  lore,  hunting,  and  shooting  as  would 
have  delighted  the  heart  of  Daniel  Boone. 

The  life  in  the  main  was  that  of  a  commu- 
nity whose  interests  are  one.  No  one  was  rich, 
yet  in  these  little  homes,  barely  furnished  and 


I/O  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

unattractive,  no  one  thought  himself  poor. 
Hospitality  abounded,  and  each  gave  to  the 
other's  need  with  a  generosity  that  knew  no 
touch  of  either  patronage  or  shame. 

But  however  simple  it  may  be,  the  life  of 
every  people  is  full  of  events  which  make  up 
home  histories  and  heart  histories  ;  there  came  a 
day  when  the  Tennessee  Mountains  found  their 
chronicler,  and  as  seemed  most  right,  the  chron- 
icle was  written  by  one  who  was  mountain  born. 

This  was  Mary  Noailles  Murfree,  who  was 
born  at  Grantlands,  the  family  home  near  Mur- 
freesboro,  named  after  her  ancestor.  Colonel 
Murfree,  of  Revolutionary  fame.  Miss  Mur- 
free made  her  studies  of  Tennessee  life  from 
nature.  Her  childhood  was  spent  among  the 
people  whose  humble  lives  she  describes  with 
the  loving  fidelity  of  a  native  historian.  Though 
well-born  and  tenderly  reared,  her  heart,  edu- 
cated by  contact  with  these  mountaineers,  re- 
sponded generously  to  their  unaffected  worth. 

She  saw  that  here  survived  a  race  which  still 
held  many  traditions  of  the  young  days  of 
the  republic,  when  communities  were  welded 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  Ijl 

together  by  common  interests,  and  where  sim- 
pHcity  of  living  very  often  bred  largeness  of 
nature. 

Under  the  often  uncouth  exterior  of  these 
men  and  women  she  found  the  most  generous 
hospitality,  the  delicacy  of  sincere  good  fellow- 
ship, and  the  inborn  self-respect  that  made  the 
mountaineers  genuine  lords  of  the  soil.  She 
saw,  too,  the  finer  graces  that  lay  like  bloom 
upon  these  rough  lives.  In  her  lovely  sketch 
of  girlhood — The  Star  in  the  Valley — one 
sees  the  flower-like  innocence  and  charm  of 
the  young  heroine  shining  out  amid  her  sordid 
surroundings,  while  her  story  of  self-sacrifice 
appeals  to  the  heart. 

Again  and  again  this  note  of  human  sym- 
pathy, sweet  as  a  wild  bird's  song,  and  with  as 
legitimate  a  place  in  the  great  harmonies  of 
life,  thrills  through  these  vivid  transcriptions. 
Sketch  after  sketch  presented  itself  to  the 
author's  mind,  was  written  down  and  pub- 
lished, and  in  1884,  ^  volume  of  the  stories 
appeared  under  the  title,  In  the  Tennessee 
Mountains, 


1/2  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

Miss  Murfree's  work  appeared  from  the 
beginning  under  the  pseudonym,  Charles  Eg- 
bert Craddock,  and  she  had  won  fame  long 
before  her  personality  was  discovered.  All 
her  stories,  now  numbering  several  volumes, 
have  been  published  under  her  pen  name. 
The  titles  of  the  books — Where  the  Battle 
was  Fought ;  Down  the  Ravine  ;  The  P7^oph' 
et  of  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains ;  In  the 
Clouds ;  The  Story  of  Keedon  Bluffs  ;  The 
Despot  of  Bloomsedge  Cove;  and  His  Fallen 
Star,  all  show  their  local  setting,  and  are  in- 
teresting as  being  stories  of  the  home  life  of  a 
people  still  in  the  primitive  stage  of  its  exist- 
ence. The  Tennessee  mountaineer  will  lose 
his  individuality  w^ith  the  advancing  tide  of 
modern  social  life  ;  but  his  unique  personality 
will  be  preserved  by  Miss  Murfree's  art,  and 
will  furnish  one  more  picturesque  element  in 
the  history  of  American  life. 

During  the  Civil  War  the  Army  of  North- 
ern Virginia  was  encamped  for  two  winters 
not    very    far    from    the    home    of    Thomas 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 73 

Nelson  Page,  then  a  boy  of  eight  years.  On 
either  side  the  plantation  ran  the  two  prin- 
cipal roads  leading  to  Richmond,  and  it 
was  known  throughout  the  country-side  that 
the  army  under  Grant  would  probably  pass 
that  way  when  on  its  road  to  the  Southern 
capital. 

Much  of  the  storm  and  stress  of  the  actual 
struggle  went  on  in  this  region,  and  the  younger 
generation  received  an  impression  of  the  war 
only  possible  to  eye-witnesses.  Thomas  Nel- 
son Page  was  born  of  an  old  Virginia  family 
which  had  been  distinguished  since  colonial 
days.  His  great-grandfather  on  his  father's 
side  had  been  the  friend  of  Thomas  Jefferson 
and  one  of  the  leading  patriots  of  the  Revolu- 
tion, while  from  his  mother  he  was  descended 
from  General  Thomas  Nelson,  one  of  the 
signers  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence. 
The  boy's  own  father  was  a  major  in  the  army 
of  General  Lee.  As  in  many  other  Southern 
homes  of  the  day,  nearly  every  incident  of  life 
on  the  Page  domain  centred  in  some  way 
around  the  war.     The  children  knew  little  else 


174  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

besides  the  talk  of  battle  and  campaign,  and 
they  were  so  young  that  their  memories  hard- 
ly went  back  beyond  the  dark  days  in  whose 
shadow  they  were  living. 

Young  Page  received  thus  in  childhood  those 
impressions  which  sank  so  indelibly  in  his 
mind  that  when  revived  in  after-years  they  were 
still  fresh  and  vivid.  He  knew  all  the  discom- 
fort that  beset  a  neighborhood  over  which  ar- 
mies marched  backward  and  forward,  and  he 
shared  in  the  excitement  which  filled  every 
heart  when  the  news  of  Grant's  advance  was 
alternately  reported  and  denied.  Much  of  the 
actual  horrors  of  war  were  also  known  by  the 
boy,  who  became  familiar  with  stories  of  defeat, 
of  prison  life,  and  of  death,  long  before  the  age 
when  children  more  happily  placed  learn  of 
these  things.  These  stories,  told  by  fugitives, 
flying  from  the  Northern  Army,  by  soldiers 
home  on  furlough,  or  wounded  and  dying  far 
from  home,  found  their  way  to  his  ears  and  be- 
came a  part  of  his  life.  It  was  natural  that 
when  he  had  become  a  man  the  memory  of 
those  childish  days  should  prompt  him  to  write 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 75 

down  some  of  the  experiences  which  still  lin- 
gered in  his  recollection. 

His  first  published  story,  Marse  Chan,  was 
written  after  reading  a  letter  which  had  been 
taken  from  the  pocket  of  a  dead  Confederate 
soldier.  This  letter,  which  was  from  the 
soldier's  sweetheart,  expressed  one  of  those 
touching  incidents  furnished  by  the  war,  and 
which  Mr.  Page  used  to  such  good  effect  that 
the  story  is  considered  by  some  the  best  piece 
of  fiction  born  of  the  struggle. 

The  success  of  this  story  upon  its  appear- 
ance in  the  Cent2iiy  Magazine  made  its  author 
famous.  He  received  letters  from  all  over  the 
United  States  and  from  many  places  in  Europe 
congratulating  him  upon  the  pathetic  and  faith- 
ful picture  he  had  drawn. 

In  this  story  the  author  struck  a  note  which 
vibrated  with  the  tumult  of  the  actual  struggle 
between  North  and  South  during  the  Civil 
War.  Marse  Chan  is  the  hero  of  the  humble 
negro  who  is  made  his  chronicler,  and  the  tale 
is  told  with  all  the  passion  of  hopeless  sorrow. 

In  this  story  Mr.  Page  deviated  somewhat 


176  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY  WRITERS 

from  the  custom  of  other  Southern  writers. 
Their  work  mainly  lay  with  the  conditions  pre- 
ceding or  following  the  war.  But  the  author 
of  Marse  Chan,  following  the  lines  of  his  first 
story,  has  very  largely  chronicled  the  heart- 
history  of  the  war  itself.  When,  as  in  the  case 
of  Marse  Chan  and  Meh  Lady,  the  story  is 
told  by  some  faithful,  devoted  slave,  the  effect 
is  indescribably  pathetic.  All  the  bitter  feeling 
that  raged  between  the  two  sections  seems  to 
fade  away  in  the  presence  of  a  love  so  loyal  and 
so  unselfish. 

Marse  Chan  was  followed  by  other  stories 
of  equal  interest,  the  series  being  embodied  in 
book -form  in  1887  and  entitled  hi  Old  Vir- 
ginia. 

The  next  year  appeared  that  charming  lit- 
tle juvenile.  Two  Little  Confederates,  a  story 
of  pluck,  adventure,  and  boyish  heroism,  for 
which  the  events  of  the  war  served  as  a  back- 
ground, and  into  which  were  woven  many 
vivid  pictures  of  the  life  of  the  period. 

A  series  of  essays — The  Old  South — still  fur- 
ther vindicated  Mr.  Page's  claim  to  recognition. 


THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS  1 7/ 

These  essays,  treating  an  old  subject  from  a  new 
point  of  view,  are  full  of  that  delightful  color 
which  tinges  all  the  author's  work.  They  are, 
moreover,  examples  of  admirable  workman- 
ship, showing  an  artistic  perception  and  a  mas- 
tery of  form. 

On  New  Found  River,  Pastime  Stories,  to- 
gether with  other  material  not  collected  in 
book-form,  have,  with  their  appearance,  won 
still  higher  fame  for  their  author. 

Since  the  publication  of  his  first  volume. 
Flute  and  Violin,  in  1891,  James  Lane  Allen, 
the  historian  of  the  blue-grass  country,  has  con- 
tinued to  present,  one  after  another,  charming 
pictures  of  his  native  State. 

Flute  and  Violin  is  a  story  of  the  early  days  of 
Kentucky,  when  the  "  dark  and  bloody  ground" 
was  one  of  the  outposts  of  American  civiHza- 
tion.  This  little  tale  of  two  native  musicians, 
one  an  old  parson  and  the  other  a  lame  boy, 
shines  with  a  tender  light  across  the  background 
of  bloodshed  and  ruin  which  darkened  the  early 
annals  of  frontier  life.     Equally  sweet  and  true 


1/8  THE   SOUTHERN   STORY   WRITERS 

to  the  finer  sides  of  life  are  the  stories  of  Sister 
Dolorosa  and  the  White  Cowl,  published  in 
the  same  volume.  \xi  A  Kentucky  Cardinal 
and  Li  Arcadia  Mr.  Allen  has  transcribed  his 
love  for  nature  into  two  pretty  romances,  he 
being  a  naturalist  in  the  same  degree  that  he 
is  a  novelist.  His  descriptions  of  Kentucky 
wild  flowers,  birds,  fields,  and  roads  are  so  true 
to  nature  that  they  might  be  inserted  in  treat- 
ises on  natural  science. 

The  literary  world  of  to-day  knows  no  voice 
truer  and  sweeter  than  that  of  this  poet  of  his 
native  fields  and  woods. 

Among  Southern  writers  in  other  fields  Miss 
Grace  King,  Miss  Sarah  Eliott,  Miss  Molly 
Elliot  Seawell,  and  others,  following  the  lines 
of  Southern  thought,  have  presented  its  social 
life  from  many  points  of  view.  Thus  expressed 
by  the  able  and  sympathetic  artists,  Southern 
fiction  forms  one  of  the  most  interesting  move- 
ments of  American  literature. 


CHAPTER  XI 

LOUISA    MAY    ALCOTT 

1833— 1888 

Louisa  May  Alcott,  though  bom  in  German- 
town,  Pa.,  was  by  inheritance  a  child  of  New 
England,  of  which  her  father  and  mother  were 
both  natives.  At  the  time  of  her  birth  her 
father  had  charge  of  a  school,  which,  two  years 
later,  he  gave  up  and  returned  to  Boston,  re- 
moving in  turn  to  Concord  when  Louisa  was 
eight  years  of  age. 

All  the  world  has  read  in  Little  Women  the 
chronicle  of  that  happy  childhood  passed  in 
the  shadow  of  the  Concord  elms ;  and  the 
experiences  of  the  sisters  Beth,  Meg,  Amy, 
and  Jo,  have  won  a  place  in  American  lit- 
erature which  the  child-heart  will  never  will- 
ingly let  go.  Undoubtedly  the  liveliest  and 
brightest  of  the  merry  group  of  girls  was 
Louisa  herself,  whose  wit  made  stock  out  of 


l8o  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

household  calamities,  and  whose  ambition  made 
defeat  but  an  incentive  to  fresh  endeavor. 
Two  generations  of  children  have  now  thrilled 
with  delight  over  the  recitals  which  have  made 
that  home-history,  a  great  part  of  which  is 
autobiographical,  one  of  the  most  sympathetic 
revelations  of  childhood  ever  given  to  the 
world.  For  above  and  beyond  the  tale  of 
merry  adventure  or  mad  escapade,  there 
thrills  that  reminiscent  quality  to  which  the 
heart  of  childhood  ever  responds.  Jo  toiling 
from  cellar  to  garret  in  her  childish  yet  serious 
masquerade  of  Pilgrim's  Progress,  or  Beth  per- 
plexed with  tender  pity  over  the  mystery 
of  death,  are  alike  typical  of  the  genuine 
thoughts  of  the  child,  and  the  youthful  reader 
is  often  living  over  his  own  experiences  when 
perusing  this  fascinating  record.  This  unique 
charm,  which  is  necessarily  absent  in  great 
works  of  imagination,  will  no  doubt  give  the 
story  of  Louisa  Alcott's  early  days  a  permanent 
place  in  literature,  as  it  has  already  accorded  it 
a  fame  which  rivals  the  classic  renown  of  Rob- 
inson Crusoe  and  Robin  Hood. 


LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT  l8l 

The  happy  life  of  the  Alcott  girls  at  Con- 
cord was  shared  by  the  children  of  Emerson, 
Hawthorne,  Channing,  and  other  prominent 
men  of  letters  whose  homes  were  then  in 
that  quiet  village.  Mr.  Alcott  was  his  chil- 
dren's teacher,  and  very  often  he  was  their  most 
genial  play-fellow.  Their  mother,  a  woman  of 
noble  nature  and  rare  force  of  character,  was 
their  tender  friend  as  well  as  their  loving  ad- 
viser. All  the  children  kept  diaries,  and  in 
Louisa's  is  recorded  many  of  her  struggles  with 
a  rather  tempestuous  nature,  and  many  earnest 
resolves  to  be  a  ''  good  child."  Scattered  here 
and  there  through  the  pages  of  the  diary  are 
found  little  notes  from  her  mother,  commend- 
ing some  special  act  of  obedience  or  self-re- 
straint, praises  dear  to  the  child's  heart,  whose 
highest  ambition  was  to  be  dutiful. 

To  the  Alcott  children,  books  of  course 
were  familiar.  Before  she  could  read,  Louisa 
played  with  books,  building  houses  of  histories 
and  bridges  of  dictionaries.  Even  then  she 
was  possessed  with  a  desire  to  write,  and  in- 
scribed strange  characters  in  the  blank  pages 


1 82  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

of  Plutarch  and  Bacon.  When  the  time  for 
lessons  and  reading  actually  began,  the  chil- 
dren all  became  omnivorous  readers,  Louisa 
devouring  novels,  histories,  poetry,  and  fairy 
stories  with  unappeasable  appetite. 

Being  a  New  England  child  she  was  also 
taught  to  sew,  becoming  so  skilful  in  this  ac- 
complishment that  she  set  up  a  doll's  dress- 
making establishment,  which  became  famous 
for  its  select  styles,  and  was  patronized  by  all 
the  children  in  the  neighborhood. 

The  Concord  house  had  a  large  garden  and 
barn  attached,  both  of  which  were  a  delight  to 
the  children.  In  the  garden  their  father  gave 
them  practical  lessons  in  botany  and  in  the 
study  of  nature,  and  in  the  barn  they  held 
meetings,  discussed  books,  and  acted  plays. 
Once  they  found  a  little  robin  lying  cold  and 
starved  on  the  garden-walk.  They  warmed  and 
fed  the  pretty  thing,  and  Louisa,  full  of  tender 
pity,  celebrated  the  event  in  her  first  poem. 
The  Robin.  The  verses  pleased  her  mother, 
whose  praise  was  very  sweet  to  the  eight-year- 
old  child.    From  this  time  she  frequently  Wir  .te 


LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT  1 83 


verses  inspired  by  the  circumstances  of  her 
childish  Hfe.  Her  prose  efforts  were  always 
more  ambitious  ;  dramas  and  tales  of  heroic 
adventure  were  the  only  things  thought  worthy 
her  pen,  and  the  plays  were  undoubtedly  a 
success.  They  were  acted  in  the  barn,  and  for 
the  time  being  the  real  Cinderella  walked  be- 
fore the  eyes  of  the  audience,  and  the  brave 
prince  truly  waked  the  Sleeping  Beauty  with 
a  kiss. 

By  the  time  she  was  eleven  years  old  Louisa, 
though  so  famous  among  the  children  of  her 
set  as  an  author  of  lively  plays,  was  stor- 
ing her  mind  with  good  literature.  She  read 
Plutarch's  lives  and  Scott's  novels,  Goldsmith, 
the  life  of  Martin  Luther,  and  the  English 
poets  outside  the  daily  lessons,  and  the  daily 
household  tasks,  for  the  Alcotts  were  poor,  and 
the  girls  had  each  her  special  work. 

Between  eleven  and  fifteen  Louisa  passed 
the  years  at  Fruitlands,  a  little  settlement  that 
Mr.  Alcott  had  founded  near  Concord.  It 
was  during  this  time  that  the  children  learned 
that  in  the  coming  years    their   mother  must 


1 84  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

look  to  them  for  help  in  the  support  of  the 
family,  and  bravely  they  set  themselves  to  the 
task.  Louisa  in  particular  was  inspired  by  a 
passion  to  be  her  mother's  helper.  Her  whole 
soul  was  devoted  to  this  object,  and  every 
scheme  which  presented  itself  to  her  mind  had 
this  end  in  view.  For  herself  she  cared  as  lit- 
tle as  it  was  possible.  One  only  little  wish  and 
ambition  did  she  have,  and  that  was  to  possess 
a  little  room  of  her  very  own  where  she  might 
retire  and  ** think  her  thoughts"  without  inter- 
ruption, and  do  such  work  as  came  to  her. 

In  one  of  those  sweet  correspondences  which 
the  old  diary  has  preserved  she  confessed  this 
desire  to  her  mother.  In  an  answering  note 
we  learn  that  the  overworked  and  overworked 
mother  found  time  and  means  somehow  to  ac- 
complish this  desire,  and  the  little  room,  with 
work-basket  and  desk  by  the  window,  and  a 
door  that  opened  into  the  garden,  made  glad 
the  heart  of  the  unselfish  child.  About  this 
time  Emerson  presented  her  with  Goethe's 
Correspondence  zvith  a  Child,  a  book  that 
fired  her  imagination  and  introduced  what  she 


LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT  185 

has  termed  the  ''  romantic  period  "  of  her  youth. 
She  was  fifteen,  and  it  suddenly  occurred  to 
her  that  it  would  be  an  interesting  thing  to 
have  such  a  friendship  with  Emerson  as  existed 
between  Goethe  and  the  child  Bettina.  She 
took  to  writing  letters,  which,  however,  were 
never  sent ;  she  wandered  around  by  moonlight, 
and  sat  at  midnight  under  the  trees  looking  at 
the  stars.  Presently,  however,  her  New  Eng- 
land common-sense  came  to  the  rescue.  She 
realized  that  her  poetry  was  nonsense,  and  that 
she,  in  fact,  had  been  very  silly  to  try  and  wor- 
ship as  a  romantic  hero  one  whose  friendship 
had  from  earliest  years  led  her  soul  into  noble 
paths. 

When  Louisa  was  eighteen  her  serious  ambi- 
tion was  to  write  plays  and  become  a  success- 
ful actress.  Her  sisters  had  entire  confidence 
in  her  ability  to  do  both,  and  much  labor  was 
spent  over  the  production  and  enacting  of 
lurid  dramas.  It  was  a  great  event  when  the 
manager  of  a  Boston  theatre  actually  consented 
to  bring  out  one  of  these  plays,  called  ZlIP 
Rival  Prima  Donnas,  although  from  some  mis-  -^ 


1 86  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

take  of  the  management  it  was  never  produced. 
Later,  a  farce  called  Nat  Bachelor  s  Pleasure 
Trip  was  produced  at  the  Howard  Athenaeum 
and  was  fairly  approved  by  the  public  and 
press. 

During  these  early  days  of  playwriting  the 
Alcott  girls  were  striving  in  every  way  to  share 
the  burden  of  the  family  expenses.  Louisa 
sewed,  taught,  and  wrote,  but  none  of  these 
things  paid  very  well.  The  family  poverty 
was  a  real  and  very  distressing  fact,  and  no 
way  seemed  to  open  toward  a  successful  fight 
against  it. 

By  the  time  she  was  twenty-two,  however, 
Louisa  had  decided  that  her  talent  lay  in  the 
way  of  authorship.  She  at  that  time  published 
her  first  book,  a  little  volume  of  tales  that  she 
had  written  for  Emerson's  daughter  Ellen,  and 
which  came  out  under  the  title.  Flower  Fables, 
This  book  contained  some  pretty  fancies  and 
showed  some  talent,  but  it  is  now  only  valua- 
ble as  marking  the  beginning  of  a  successful 
career. 

Many  short  stories  and  poems  had  by  this 


LOUISA   MAY  ALCOTT  1 87 

time  found  their  way  to  different  papers  and 
periodicals,  and  for  the  next  seven  years  her 
pen  was  busy,  though  the  remuneration  she  re- 
ceived was  not  entirely  gratifying. 

But  the  pleasure  which  this  success  brought 
was  saddened  by  the  fatal  illness  of  ''  Beth," 
Louisa's  favorite  sister.  After  two  years'  suf- 
fering ''  Beth's"  gentle  spirit  slipped  away, 
leaving  a  place  forever  desolate  in  *'Jo's"  faith- 
ful heart.  The  old,  revered  friends,  Emerson 
and  Thoreau,  helped  to  carry  the  little,  worn- 
out  body  to  its  last  resting-place  in  Sleepy 
Hollow,  and  Louisa  wrote  in  her  diary  that  she 
knew  what  death  meant. 

In  1 86 1  Miss  Alcott  published  her  novel 
Moods,  the  most  ambitious  work  she  had  yet 
attempted,  and  one  on  which  she  placed  many 
fond  hopes.  But  although  Moods  represented 
all  the  ideality  and  poetry  of  life  as  it  then 
appeared  to  the  young  author,  it  was  not  a 
great  success.  She  had  toiled  faithfully  over 
its  composition,  and  had  wrought  into  it  many 
of  her  own  girlish  dreams,  but  the  heroine  was 
not  real,  and  many  of  the  situations  were  artifi- 


1 88  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

cial.  The  defect  lay  in  the  author's  own  gift, 
which  did  not  reach  out  to  work  of  a  purely- 
imaginative  character. 

Miss  Alcott  was  bitterly  disappointed  over 
the  meagre  success  of  Moods,  which  she  attrib- 
uted to  the  many  changes  she  had  made  in  it, 
through  the  advice  of  the  different  publishers 
who  had  rejected  it.  In  spite  of  the  fame  that 
her  other  books  brought,  Moods  always  held  a 
warm  place  in  her  heart.  Her  true  work  for 
literature  was  indicated  by  an  experience  which 
widened  her  mind  and  expanded  her  sympa- 
thies as  no  girlish  day-dreams  could  ever  do. 
This  was  her  life  as  a  hospital  nurse  at  the 
front  during  the  early  days  of  the  Civil  War. 

The  Alcotts  had  no  sons  to  devote  to  the 
cause  of  the  Union,  but  they  sent  their  bravest 
and  brightest  one,  the  daughter  whom  the 
father  so  proudly  called  **  Duty's  faithful  child," 
to  serve  her  country  in  its  hour  of  need.  Miss 
Alcott  was  detailed  to  the  Georgetown  hos- 
pital, and  here  she  entered  heart  and  soul  into 
her  duties.  The  hospital  was  poorly  equipped, 
and  both  patients   and  nurses   suffered    from 


LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 


bad  air,  impure  water,  and  damp  rooms,  but  all 
put  thoughts  of  self  in  the  background,  and 
kept  as  cheery  and  bright  as  possible.  The 
new  nurse  was  a  great  favorite  with  the  soldiers, 
who  appreciated  her  fun  and  laughter,  her  un- 
failing devotion,  and  the  womanly  tenderness 
which  never  found  her  too  tired  to  write  mes- 
sages to  their  far-off  friends. 

Though  often  worn  out,  she  never  omitted 
her  own  home  letters,  which  were  faithful  tran- 
scriptions of  the  daily  hospital  life.  All  its  sad- 
ness and  pathos  appealed  to  her,  and  its  humor- 
ous side,  for  it  had  one,  found  a  response  in  her 
merry  heart.  Her  experience  here  ended  after 
six  weeks,  owing  to  a  serious  attack  of  typhoid 
fever.  The  bad  air  and  drainage  of  the  hospital 
had  done  their  work,  and  Miss  Alcott  returned 
to  Concord,  where  she  was  for  many  months 
an  invalid.  She  never  entirely  recovered  this 
shock  to  her  health,  and  the  invalidism  from 
which  she  suffered  in  her  last  years  in  reality 
dated  from  this  time. 

Upon  the  suggestion  of  a  friend  she  resolved 
to  throw  her  experience  at  Georgetown  into  lit- 


I90  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

erary  form,  and  wrote  the  first  three  of  her 
Hospital  Sketches.  These  immediately  at- 
tracted so  much  attention  that  the  series  grew 
into  a  book  which  was  published  in  1865. 
This  work,  so  full  of  real  life,  of  the  beauty  of 
heroism,  patience,  and  duty,  brought  Miss  Al- 
cott  her  first  taste  of  fame.  Eminent  men, 
among  them  Charles  Sumner,  wrote  congratu- 
lating her  upon  her  success,  and  she  found  her- 
self lionized  by  a  public  that  was  grateful  for 
this  glimpse  of  life  at  the  front.  About  this 
time  Miss  Alcott  published  in  the  Atlantic 
Monthly  her  beautiful  poem,  Thoreatis  Flute, 
a  tribute  to  the  character  of  that  noble  poet, 
and  the  most  perfect  piece  of  verse  that  the 
author  ever  made.  A  new  and  abridged  edi- 
tion of  Moods  appeared  also,  and  owing  to  the 
popularity  of  Hospital  Sketches,  won  a  gratify- 
ing success.  From  this  time  Miss  Alcott  had 
no  difficulty  in  finding  a  market  for  her  wares. 
Her  short  stories  and  sketches  were  eagerly  ac- 
cepted by  the  best  magazines  and  papers,  and 
she  even  had  some  difficulty  in  keeping  up 
with  the  demand  for  them. 


LOUISA   MAY  ALCOTT  I91 

In  1865  Miss  Alcott  made  her  first  visit  to 
Europe.  She  started  as  companion  to  an  in- 
vaHd  lady,  as  her  means  did  not  allow  her  to 
make  the  trip  otherwise,  but  later  she  joined 
her  own  friends  and  completed  her  visit  in 
their  company.  This  was  a  delightful  experi- 
ence, restful  and  health-giving  to  the  hard- 
working author.  It  was  her  first  real  holiday 
and  she  enjoyed  it  with  that  fresh,  buoyant 
spirit  that  was  so  characteristic  of  her.  Upon 
her  return  a  Boston  publisher  asked  her  for  a 
book  for  girls,  and  from  this  demand,  which 
she  feared  at  first  she  could  not  comply  with, 
grew  her  famous  story  Little  Women.  The 
full  power  and  beauty  of  this  story  was  un- 
suspected by  the  author,  and  she  was  dazzled 
by  the  brilliant  success  which  follow^ed. 

Thinking  that  she  was  merely  writing  down 
the  merry  life  of  a  happy  family  of  girls,  she 
was  in  reality  making  a  transcription  of  typi- 
cal New  England  girlhood,  and  putting  the 
touches  to  a  picture  of  rare  value.  All  the 
best  in  New  England  blood  and  manners  fil- 
ters  through   the   pages  of   this  book.     Pure 


192  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

living,  noble  thinking,  high  ideals  here  find 
a  place  and  reflect  the  girlhood  which  was 
blessed  by  the  friendship  of  Emerson,  Haw- 
thorne, Thoreau,  and  other  of  her  father's  asso- 
ciates, and  which  was  guarded  so  tenderly  by 
that  father  himself. 

This  book,  which  may  be  said  to  have 
heralded  a  new  literature  for  children,  was 
hailed  with  acclamation  by  the  young  audience 
for  whom  it  was  written.  The  publishers  were 
busy  keeping  up  the  demand  for  the  books, 
and  Miss  Alcott  began  to  receive  letters  from 
all  over  the  country  demanding  another  vol- 
ume. England,  France,  Holland,  and  Ger- 
many brought  out  rapid  editions,  and  by  the 
time  the  second  volume  was  ready  Miss  Al- 
cott's  name  was  a  household  word  wherever 
children  read  books. 

This  height,  so  unexpectedly  but  justly  won, 
Miss  Alcott  never  lost.  For  nearly  twenty 
years  longer  the  children  of  the  land  gave  her 
the  first  place  in  their  affections,  while  eacli 
successive  book  seemed  to  them  a  personal 
gift  from  the  author.      She  was  the  friend  and 


LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT  I93 

ideal  of  thousands  of  boys  and  girls  who  never 
saw  her,  but  who  felt,  beyond  a  doubt,  that 
their  interests  were  known,  and  their  hopes 
and  ambitions  dear  to  her.  Far  beyond  what 
the  author  ever  dreamed,  these  sweet  and  true 
stories  of  young  life  influenced  the  generation 
to  which  they  appealed.  Beyond  what  she 
had  hoped,  the  little  lessons  of  duty  and  noble 
living  learned  in  the  old  house  at  Concord 
brought  rich  and  noble  harvest  to  far  wider 
fields. 

The  home  life  of  the  family  was  at  this  time 
very  happy.  The  eldest  daughter,  '*  Meg,"  was 
married  and  had  two  charming  children,  the 
"  Demi  "  and  '*  Daisy  "  of  Little  Men,  though 
both  babies  were  in  reality  boys.  The  young- 
est daughter,  '*  Amy,"  was  making  progress  in 
the  study  of  art,  and  **  Jo  "  herself  was  happy 
because  she  could  earn  money  to  make  the  oth- 
ers happy.  Soon  after  the  publication  of  Little 
Women  she  went  abroad  with  her  sister  May, 
the  "Amy"  of  Little  Women,  remaining  four 
years ;   work    as  well    as   travel    occupied   the 

time.     The   day  she  arrived  home  her  father 
13 


194  LOUISA   MAY   ALCOTT 

met  her  at  the  dock,  with  a  red  placard  pinned 
in  the  carriage  window,  announcing  the  pubH- 
cation  of  Little  Men,  Like  its  forerunner,  it 
scored  a  great  success.  The  other  numbers  of 
the  Little  Women  series  grew  rapidly,  Old- 
Fas  hioned  Girl,  Eight  Cousins,  and  Rose  in 
Bloom  being  perhaps  the  favorites  next  to  the 
initial  volumes.  The  Spinning  Wheel  series, 
Aunt  Jos  Scrap-Bag  series,  and  Lulus  Li- 
brary— three  volumes  for  small  children — ap- 
peared as  the  years  went  on. 

Miss  Alcott  was  also  the  author  of  a  novel 
called  A  Modeini  Mephistopheles,  published 
anonymously  in  the  No  Name  series.  One  of 
her  best-known  books,  Work,  is  founded  on 
the  incidents  of  her  own  experience  in  her  girl- 
hood days,  when  money  was  scarce  in  the  Al- 
cott family,  and  the  young  daughters  were 
striving  in  every  way  to  lift  the  burden  from 
father  and  mother. 

Her  sister  May  married  and  died  abroad, 
leaving  her  baby-girl  to  Miss  Alcott,  and  to 
this  little  niece  she  gave  henceforth  a  mother's 
love.     Her  own  mother  and  father  were  ever 


LOUISA   MAY  ALCOTT  195 

her  dearest  care,  and  her  greatest  happiness  lay 
in  the  knowledge  that  she  had  relieved  their 
old  age  from  want. 

Miss  Alcott  died  after  a  short  illness  in  Bos- 
ton in  1888. 

Time  had  given  to  her  the  reward  she  would 
have  chosen  above  all  others — the  knowledge 
that  her  work  brought  not  only  success,  but 
that  it  carried  its  own  message  of  life's  great 
intention  to  each  young  heart  that  it  reached. 


CHAPTER    XII 

THOMAS    BAILEY    ALDRICH 
1836— 

Thomas  Bailey  Aldrich,  poet  and  novelist, 
was  born  at  Portsmouth  in  1836.  Like  many 
other  New  England  seaports,  Portsmouth,  at 
the  time  of  the  poet's  birth,  had  long  ceased  to 
be  a  wealthy  and  important  town.  No  longer 
East  India  merchantmen,  Mediterranean  trad- 
ing-vessels, English  and  French  ships,  or  great 
whalers  came  up  to  its  docks  to  leave  their 
cargoes  and  sail  away  again  to  the  distant  lands 
whose  names  were  so  familiar  to  the  inhabi- 
tants of  the  old  town.  That  was  the  Ports- 
mouth of  the  past  which  had  shown  such  fine 
fighting  qualities  during  the  Revolution,  and 
whose  oldest  inhabitants  still  remembered  how 
their  hardy  little  town  did  brave  coast  duty  in 
the  War  of  181 2.    The  Portsmouth  of  Aldrich's 


THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH  197 

youth  was  a  quiet,  sleepy  place,  which  seemed 
to  be  glad  of  a  chance  to  spend  its  old  age 
quietly,  and  whose  disused  wharves  and  crum- 
bling warehouses  attested  a  long  and  honorable 
career,  though,  like  other  earthly  things,  it  had 
come  to  an  end. 

In  this  quaint  old  town  the  better  class  still 
dwelt  in  the  family  mansions  built  in  the  eigh- 
teenth century ;  the  fisher-folk  lived  in  a  sepa- 
rate part  of  the  town,  and  they  still  flocked  to 
the  wharves  on  the  rare  occasions  of  the  ap- 
pearance of  a  new  sail  in  the  harbor,  in  the 
hope  that  here  at  last  were  tidings  of  some 
husband  or  brother  who  had  been  lost  sight  of 
for  many  a  day.  The  actual  interests  of  the 
place  still  centred  around  the  sea,  though  the 
fleets  which  came  in  sight  of  the  beautiful  har- 
bor, one  of  the  finest  in  the  world,  seldom 
dropped  anchor  there.  But  the  atmosphere 
was  full  of  the  romance  and  mystery  of  the 
ocean.  Old  sailors  who  could  tefl  tales  of  ship- 
wreck and  bold  privateering  still  haunted  the 
wharves  on  sunny  afternoons,  and  could  be 
found  available  for  story-telling  in  their  cosey 


198  THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH 

little  cabins  on  stormy  winter  days.  The  ex- 
pressions which  the  children  heard  in  the  streets, 
and  often  at  home,  in  regard  to  the  wealth,  the 
local  news,  and  world  at  large  were  often  nauti- 
cal relics  of  life  on  the  quarter-deck  riveted  into 
the  common  New  England  speech.  ''  Nor'east- 
ers"  and  *' sea-fogs,"  *'a  squally  fore-and-aft 
sky,"  and  a  proper  lack  of  respect  for  long- 
shoremen known  as  "  butter-fingered  land  lub- 
bers," were  localisms  famihar  to  all  ears.  The 
boys  were  all  **  messmates,"  and  every  one 
looked  forward  to  owning  a  three-masted  ship, 
for  the  sea,  of  course,  was  the  only  proper  thea- 
tre of  action  for  a  Portsmouth  boy. 

Ardent  lover  of  his  native  town  as  he  grew 
to  be,  Aldrich  in  his  very  young  childhood 
had  a  vague  dream  of  Portsmouth  and  all 
the  rest  of  New  England  as  a  barren  waste 
inhabited  by  red  Indians  and  poor-spirited 
whites  who  lived  mainly  in  log  huts.  He 
imbibed  this  comical  notion  from  a  residence 
in  New  Orleans,  whither  he  was  taken  while 
yet  an  infant,  and  where  he  lived  for  some 
years.     In  his  charming  S^07y  of  a  Bad  Boy, 


THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH  199 


a  biography  of  his  childhood,  he  has  told  us 
how  surprised  he  was  to  find  that  civilized 
and  even  respectable  people  lived  at  the  North, 
his  old  nurse  Chloe  having  always  taught  him 
that  a  "Yankee"  was  a  being  to  be  despised, 
utterly.  Being  taken  to  Portsmouth  however 
to  attend  school,  he  soon  became  appreciative 
of  the  fine  qualities  of  his  stately  white-haired 
grandfather,  in  whose  family  he  lived,  while  his 
life  at  school  opened  up  new  vistas  of  delight. 
He  had  a  very  healthy  and  happy  boyhood, 
many  incidents  of  which  are  transcribed  with 
grateful  affection  in  the  pages  of  the  Bad  Boy. 

It  is  essentially  the  story  of  a  New  England 
boy  of  the  generation  which  had  escaped  the 
sterner  discipline  of  an  older  day.  Still  care- 
ful of  the  training  of  mind  and  character,  the 
Puritanism  of  New  England  had  in  Aldrich's 
youth  lost  many  of  its  unlovely  characteristics. 
There  was  less  gloom  and  formality,  and,  ex- 
cept in  the  observance  of  Sunday,  many  of 
the  usages  of  early  times  had  passed  away. 

Sunday  was  still,  however,  strictly  kept.  Al- 
drich  gives  an  amusing  description  of  that  day 


200  THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH 

on  which  his  grandfather  no  longer  appeared 
any  relation  to  him,  and  when  boyish  sports, 
Robinson  Crusoe  and  the  Arabian  Nights, 
were  exchanged  for  three  sermons  a  day  and  a 
visit  to  the  family  burying-ground. 

With  this  exception,  at  school  and  at  home, 
his  life  w^as  full  of  healthful  duties  and  pleas- 
ures. He  describes  particularly  his  delight  in 
the  first  snow-storm  which  he  saw  in  Ports- 
mouth after  his  return  from  New  Orleans,  and 
how  he  stood  by  the  window  for  hours  watch- 
ing the  unfamiliar,  beautiful  scene.  He  made 
good  progress  at  school,  learning  mathematics 
and  Latin  in  the  thorough  New  England  fash- 
ion. He  had  a  host  of  boy  friends,  as  healthy 
and  fortunate  as  himself.  He  was  a  prominent 
member  of  a  flourishing  secret  society  formed 
for  the  perpetration  of  dark  and  mysterious 
deeds  ;  once  he  and  the  other  members  of  the 
society  cleaned  some  old  rusty  cannon  which 
adorned  the  wharves,  fired  them  off  with  a 
slow  fuse  at  midnight,  and  awakened  all  the 
inhabitants  under  the  impression  that  the  town 
was  being  bombarded. 


THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH  201 

He  owned  a  part  of  a  boat  and  used  to 
cruise  among  the  islands  off  the  harbor,  and 
once  he  experienced  the  bitterness  which 
many  dwellers  by  the  sea  know,  in  seeing  a 
young  companion  drift  out  forever  from  sight 
in  the  face  of  a  great  storm  which  destroyed 
twelve  sail  of  an  outgoing  fishing-fleet  before 
its  fury  abated. 

Perhaps  the  dearest  of  his  boyish  treasures 
was  his  pony,  Gypsy,  who  was  "  pretty  and 
knew  it,  and  passionately  fond  of  dress  ;  "  who 
loved  boys,  and  would  have  nothing  to  do  with 
girls ;  who  could  "  let  down  bars,  lift  up  latches, 
draw  bolts,  and  turn  all  sorts  of  buttons ; "  who 
once  ate  six  custard  pies  that  had  been  placed 
to  cool,  and  enjoyed  the  wickedness  of  the  feat 
as  much  as  did  her  young  master.  She  was  an 
affectionate  creature,  too,  and  used  to  steal  off 
whenever  she  could  and  go  to  the  Temple 
grammar-school,  which  her  master  attended, 
and  wait  for  him  with  her  forefeet  on  the  sec- 
ond step.  Aldrich's  first  composition  was  de- 
voted to  the  praise  of  the  horse,  a  tribute  to 
Gypsy,  and  when  his  school-days  were  over  he 


202  THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH 

was  only  consoled  at  parting  from  her  by  his 
grandfather's  solemn  promise  to  sell  her  to  a 
circus,  for  Gypsy  had  histrionic  talent  and  could 
*' waltz,  fire  a  pistol,  lie  down  dead,  wink  one 
eye,"  and  do  other  tricks  worthy  of  admiration. 
In  her  larger  sphere  she  became  the  belle  of 
the  circus-ring,  and  performed  wonders  on  the 
tan-bark. 

When  Aldrich  was  fifteen  his  father  died 
suddenly  in  New  Orleans.  This  changed  the 
boy's  life  materially,  as  a  college  career  had  to 
be  given  up  and  some  means  of  livelihood  se- 
cured. At  this  juncture  an  uncle  offered  him 
a  situation  in  his  business-house  in  New  York, 
and  it  was  thought  best  that  he  should  accept 
this  position.  In  the  last  glimpse  which  he 
gives  us  of  himself  in  the  Story  of  a  Bad  Boy 
he  says  that  his  uncle  insisted  upon  his  taking 
the  offer  at  once,  being  haunted  by  the  dread 
that  if  left  to  himself  the  boy  might  turn  out 
a  poet. 

This  hint  carries  us  to  the  beginning  of  Al- 
drich's  literary  career.  As  in  the  case  of  many 
other  poets,  this   calling  was  not  self-chosen. 


THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH  203 

The  boy's  ambition  was  to  become  a  Harvard 
student,  and  it  was  only  a  sense  of  duty  and  an 
unselfish  wish  to  save  his  grandfather  further 
care  that  led  him  to  consent  to  a  business  life. 
But  in  the  end  his  choice  wrought  well  for  him. 
Denied  the  means  of  carrying  on  his  studies 
as  he  would  have  liked,  he  became  his  own 
teacher.  In  the  intervals  of  work  he  read  and 
studied,  and  because  he  was  a  poet  born  he 
composed  verses.  Almost  before  he  knew 
it  this  last  occupation  engrossed  more  and 
more  of  his  time.  The  fancies  which  at  first 
chased  through  his  brain,  the  creatures  of 
an  hour's  recreation,  came  at  last  to  take  up 
their  abode  there  and  to  demand  serious  at- 
tention. 

In  this  regard  Aldrich's  gift  shows  that  it 
springs  from  true  poetic  inspiration.  Even  in 
his  earliest  verses  there  is  evidence  that  behind 
the  imagination  and  fancy  lay  the  sense  of  the 
poet's  mission  to  reveal  in  the  form  of  art  the 
beauty  and  harmony  unseen  by  the  common 
eye. 

It  is  to  be  presumed  that  the  young  poet 


204  THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH 

kept  these  aspirations  very  carefully  from 
the  knowledge  of  his  uncle,  who  certainly 
could  find  no  fault  with  the  manner  in 
which  his  nephew^'s  ofhce  duties  were  per- 
formed. 

By  the  time  he  was  eighteen  Aldrich  had 
prepared  for  the  press  a  small  volume  of  poems, 
which  he  published  under  the  title.  The  Bells. 
Before  he  was  nineteen  he  had  written  the  Bal- 
lad of  Babie  Bell,  that  exquisite  monody  of 
babyhood  which  brought  him  instant  recogni- 
tion as  a  poet  of  more  than  ordinary  promise. 
The  Ballad  of  Babie  Bell  and  other  poems 
appeared  in  book  form  in  1858.  Aldrich 
was  then  twenty-two  years  old.  He  had  se- 
cured a  position  as  publisher's  reader,  and 
had  contributed  poems,  essays,  sketches,  and 
stories  to  Putnam  s,  the  Knickerbocker,  Har- 
per s,  and  the  Atlantic  Monthly,  In  news- 
paper work  he  was  connected  with  the  New 
York  Evening  Mirror,  tht  Home  Journal,  the 
Saturday  Press,  and  other  prominent  news- 
papers of  that  date.  The  literary  life  lay  before 
him.     Other  volumes  of  poems  were  issued, 


THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH  205 

each  showing  the  poet's  true  insight.  From 
1865  to  1874  he  was  editor  of  Every  Saturday, 
and  the  following  year  he  went  abroad  on  a 
vacation  justly  earned. 

He  visited  England  and  Ireland,  France, 
Germany,  Italy,  and  Austria.  To  each  place 
he  brought  the  sympathy  of  a  finely  attuned 
nature,  and  from  each  he  seemed  to  carry  away 
some  experience  that  broadened  his  intellectual 
outlook.  The  itinerary  of  this  journey  was 
published  afterward  in  the  Atlantic  Alonthly 
in  a  charming  series  called  From  Ponkapog  to 
Pesth. 

Aldrich  was  later  made  editor  of  the  Atla^i- 
tic  Monthly,  a  position  which  he  held  for  a 
number  of  years.  In  American  poetry  this  au- 
thor has  created  a  school  of  his  own.  The 
peculiar  temper  of  his  gift  was  shown  in  the 
Ballad  of  Babie  Bell,  in  which  the  fragrant 
grace  and  innocence  of  babyhood  seems  to 
have  been  revealed  to  the  poet  in  as  pure  a 
vision  as  ever  came  to  a  knight  of  the  Holy 
Grail.  This  story  of  the  death  of  a  child,  in 
which  death  is  made  so  beautiful    and    child- 


206  THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH 

hood  SO  holy,  indicated  that  fineness  of  per- 
ception which  is  Aldrich's  most  striking  char- 
acteristic. 

All  his  conceits  and  fancies,  his  illustrations 
of  life  and  character,  both  of  his  lighter  and 
graver  hours,  reveal  that  delicate,  inward  vision 
which  make  his  work  so  distinctive.  His  sub- 
jects are  as  varied  as  his  own  vagrant  fancies, 
which  seem  to  find  all  places  in  earth  and  air 
welcome  and  habitable.  Sometimes  it  is  a 
monk  of  the  Middle  Ages  whose  sin  and  re- 
pentance he  incorporates  in  charming  verse  as 
in  Friar  Jerome  s  Beautiful  Book.  Again  it 
is  the  old  Hebrew  story  of  Judith,  or  the 
Roman  legend  of  Ara-Coeli,  telling  how  the 
little  waxen  ba7nbino  found  its  way  back  alone 
in  the  storm  and  darkness  to  the  convent 
from  which  it  had  been  stolen. 

An  Indian  maiden  whose  memory  had  be- 
come legendary  long  before  the  discovery  of 
America ;  an  old  Greek  coin  bearing  the  coined 
head  of  Minerva  ;  a  castle  of  feudal  days  with 
arches  crumbling  to  dust  and  drawbridge  fall- 
ing, each  claims  his  fancy,  and  is  by  him  woven 


THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH  207 

into  the  graceful  and  beautiful  fabric    of  his 
verse. 

Nowhere  is  his  touch  more  sensitive  than  in 
his  appreciation  of  nature,  as  known  to  New 
England,  where  ice-storms  and  sleet  and  hail, 
fogs  and  bleak  winds  all  become  a  part  of  the 
poet's  consciousness  and  teach  their  own  lessons 
of  courage  and  endurance.  New  England 
wild  flowers  and  summer  fields  have  also  their 
tribute  from  their  own  poet,  w^ho  sings  their 
praises  in  The  Bhte  Bells  of  New  England  and 
who  acknowledges  no  enchantment  so  binding 
as  that  of  the  May  of  his  native  land.  The  Sis- 
ters Tragedy  and  the  beautiful  Monody  on  the 
Death  of  Wendell  Phillips  are  also  among  the 
notable  poems.  Wyiidham  Towers,  the  most 
ambitious  of  the  later  poems,  is  a  legend  of  the 
days  of  Elizabeth,  which  reappears  in  the  reign 
of  Charles  the  Second.  This  story  of  two  cour- 
tiers of  Elizabeth,  who  were  brothers  and  rivals, 
and  whose  fate  remained  a  mystery  for  over  a 
century,  is  told  by  Aldrich  in  charming  verse, 
characterized  by  his  own  peculiar  graces  of 
touch.     Unguarded  Gates,   a  collection  of  his 


208  THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH 

latest  poems,  contains  many  beautiful  specimens 
that  reveal  the  master's  mind,  still  alive  to  all 
those  subtle  varying  moods  of  thought,  which 
make  his  work  so  distinctive. 

In  prose  Aldrich  has  produced  more  than 
one  novel  of  character,  true  to  the  old  New 
England  traditions  which  moulded  the  thought 
of  the  Puritans,  and  artistic  in  execution.  His 
prose,  like  his  poetry,  possesses  the  undefinable 
quality  which  sets  it  apart  from  other  contem- 
porary work.  Among  his  novels,  Prttdence 
Palfrey  and  the  Stillwater  Tragedy  are  the 
best,  while  of  his  shorter  stories,  Marjorie  Daw 
ranks  easily  first,  both  in  point  of  literary  excel- 
lence and  from  the  will-o'-the-wisp  remoteness 
which  marks  its  relationship  to  the  genuine 
fairy-brood. 

In  some  ways  the  fancy  of  Aldrich  very 
nearly  approaches  that  of  Hawthorne.  Above 
all  other  New  England  writers  these  two  pos- 
sess the  charm  which  unlocks  that  realm  of 
fancy  wherein  wandered  Spenser  and  Shake- 
speare, Shelley,  Coleridge,  and  Keats.  This 
wonder-world  is  not  always  open,  even  to  poets ; 


THOMAS   BAILEY   ALDRICH  2O9 

whoever  enters  it  must  wear  the  badge  of  the 

elfin  crew  which  wanders  invisible  at  will,  and 

which  only  kindred  sight   can    discover.     Al- 

drich,  true  knight  of   this  goodly    fellowship 

has  visited  their  haunts  more  than  once.     That 

he  was  well  received  is  evinced  by  the  secrets 

he  has  brought  back  and  which  he  has  woven 

with  the  poet's  cunning  into  his  art. 
14 


CHAPTER  XIII 

NEW  ENGLAND  WOMEN  WRITERS 

In  New  England,  as  well  as  in  the  South 
and  West,  the  novelists  of  to-day  have  pressed 
their  own  surroundings  into  the  service  of  art. 
The  pictures  they  have  given  us  are  thus  true 
to  nature.  They  illustrate  the  quiet  hours  of 
the  nation's  life,  the  hours  in  which  it  truly 
grows  and  fulfils  the  purpose  of  its  being,  and 
the  pictures  are  therefore  very  valuable.  Most 
of  this  fiction  is  thrown  into  the  form  of  short 
stories,  and  these  are  contributed  by  so  many 
different  authors  that  we  are  able  to  get  many 
points  of  view. 

The  material  here  used  is  perhaps  not  so 
picturesque  as  that  offered  to  the  writers  of  the 
South  and  West ;  New  England,  except  in  its 
earliest  days,  has  never  been  the  land  of  ro- 
mance ;  but  here  the  progress  of  those  ideas 
that    make   a   country's    greatness    has   gone 


NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS  211 


Steadily  on.  The  writers  of  to-day  still  reflect 
the  thought  and  manners  that  were  moulded 
under  the  influence  of  the  great  men  of  the 
past.  The  genius  of  Hawthorne  and  the  spirit 
of  Emerson  made  a  permanent  impression 
upon  American  art  and  life,  and  the  children 
of  their  own  blood  have  not  forgotten  their 
lessons.  Thus  we  find  New  England  fiction 
largely  dealing  with  the  moral  life  of  the  peo- 
ple. Character  sketches,  stories  of  temptation, 
defeat  and  victory,  battles  lost  and  won  by  the 
soul,  form  the  motifs  of  these  tales  ;  and  al- 
though New  England  to  -  day  can  claim  no 
great  novelist,  yet  its  artistic  purpose  is  as  pure 
and  elevated  as  when  it  laid  the  foundations  of 
American  literature. 

Interwoven  with  these  stories  are  many  pict- 
ures of  manners  and  home  surroundings  which 
make  an  atmosphere  of  reality.  This  atmos- 
phere, changing  with  every  age,  as  the  con- 
ditions of  life  change,  has  been  so  reflected  in 
the  work  of  to-day,  as  to  make  it  in  itself  a 
mirror  of  the  every-day  history  of  the  people. 
And  this  has  its  value  also. 


212  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN    WRITERS 

Perhaps  the  work  of  no  woman  wTiter  so 
intimately  connects  the  spirit  of  the  New 
England  of  the  past  with  that  of  to-day  as 
does  that  of  Mrs.  Julia  Ward  Howe.  Mrs. 
Howe  has  always  been  an  advocate  of  ideas. 
Life  has  seemed  to  her  a  mission  of  service  ; 
although  not  a  Puritan  by  descent,  she  has 
fought  nobly  in  the  cause  of  Puritanism,  the 
cause  of  justice  and  humanity.  Though  her 
anti-slavery  and  philanthropic  w^ork,  and  her 
advocacy  of  woman  suffrage  have  occupied 
much  more  of  her  time  than  her  literary  life, 
yet  her  writings  belong  eminently  to  the  his- 
tory of  American  literature.  They  represent 
very  strongly  the  ideas  which  the  republic  has 
always  sought  to  maintain,  and  in  one  case 
their  author  embodied  in  verse  the  spirit  of 
the  nation  in  one  of  its  greatest  hours.  That 
poem,  The  Battle  Hy77in  of  the  Republic,  was 
a  song  and  a  prophecy  of  liberty  in  its  highest 
sense.  It  was  a  reminder  of  the  part  that 
America  had  elected  to  play  in  the  great 
drama  of  national  life.  Wherever  its  words 
fell    they    stirred    the    soul    to  such  noble    re- 


NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS  213 

spouse,  that  it  became  the  war-cry  of  the  na- 
tion. It  was  sung  in  schools,  and  incorporated 
in  the  services  of  the  Church  ;  under  its  inspi- 
ration the  Union  forces  marched  on  to  victory, 
and  the  republic  may  be  said  to  have  achieved 
the  great  intention  of  its  existence  to  the  beat 
of  its  triumphant  measures. 

The  air  to  which  the  song  is  set  was  heard 
originally  in  the  South.  A  visitor  from  the 
North,  present  at  a  colored  meeting,  was  struck 
by  the  vigor  and  swing  which  characterized  the 
singing  of  this  tune,  and  on  his  return  wrote 
down  the  melody.  The  popular  war  song 
John  Browns  Body  was  afterward  written  to 
this  music.  During  a  visit  to  Washington  in 
the  first  year  of  the  war,  Mrs.  Howe  went  one 
day  to  see  a  review  of  the  troops  ;  the  drill  was 
interrupted  by  a  movement  on  the  part  of 
the  enemy,  and  the  sight  of  the  troops  filing 
back  to  cantonments  fired  Mrs.  Howe's  heart ; 
she  began  singing  John  Browns  Body  as  the 
men  marched  past,  and  the  inspiration  of  the 
Battle  Hymn  of  the  Republic  came  to  her 
in  that  moment ;   the  next  morning  at  dawn 


214  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS 

she    rose    and  wrote  the  words    of    the    most 
famous  song  of  the  war. 

Mrs.  Howe  was  born  in  New  York  in  1819. 
Her  father,  Samuel  Ward,  was  a  man  of  wealth 
and  prominent  in  public  affairs.  The  family 
mansion  near  Bowling  Green,  then  a  fashion- 
able neighborhood,  was  noted  for  its  hospital- 
ity, and  the  children  were  accustomed  to  meet- 
ing the  many  famous  men  and  women  who 
found  their  way  to  New  York.  Julia  was  the 
fourth  child,  and  was  considered  remarkably 
clever  even  in  this  family  of  bright  children. 
She  began  to  write  poetry  while  still  a  very 
little  girl,  and  since  she  was  a  born  leader,  she 
insisted  that  her  younger  sisters  should  also 
write  poetry.  Many  childish  scenes  of  despair 
occurred  before  this  resolution  was  set  aside, 
but  Julia  still  retained  her  faculty  for  leadership. 
Whatever  she  believed  was  so  vital  to  her  that 
she  seemed  impelled  to  impress  others  with  the 
same  view.  This  characteristic,  broadened  and 
strengthened  by  favorable  circumstances,  en- 
abled its  possessor  in  later  life  to  accomplish  a 
noble  work  for  humanity. 


NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS  21$ 

At  the  time  of  Mrs.  HowVs  childhood  New 
York  was  the  home  of  that  brilliant  circle  of 
poets,  essayists,  and  scholars  who  followed  in 
the  footsteps  of  Irving  and  made  the  culture  of 
the  day  a  noble  foundation  for  its  future  liter- 
ary life.  Some  of  these  men  had  been  among 
the  first  Americans  who  made  pilgrimages  to 
the  old  world  in  search  of  the  higher  culti- 
vated artistic  life  denied  them  at  home.  Many 
of  them  had  given  to  European  society  its  first 
glimpse  of  the  best  social  life  of  the  new  world, 
and  in  more  than  one  instance  the  nature  and 
charm  of  their  talents  were  appreciated  abroad 
as  well  as  at  home.  New  York  was  still  a 
small  city.  The  fashionable  streets  were  found 
in  neighborhoods  not  far  from  the  Battery, 
and  the  social  life,  though  dignified,  was  in 
many  respects  very  simple.  Old  -  fashioned 
stages  and  family  carriages  were  the  means  of 
conveyance  beyond  the  city  limits  along  the 
shady  country  roads  which  led  toward  Boston 
and  Albany,  and  which  are  now  known  as  the 
Bowery  and  the  Western  Boulevard.  Much 
picturesqueness  characterized  the  houses,  many 


2l6  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS 

of  which  were  built  in  the  old  Dutch  fashion, 
and  surrounded  by  large,  luxuriant  flower  gar- 
dens. Christmas,  Thanksgiving,  the  Fourth 
of  July,  and  above  all  the  Dutch  New-Year's- 
Day,  were  still  dignified  festivals,  honored  and 
enjoyed  by  all  classes  alike. 

In  this  atmosphere  of  ease  and  unostenta- 
tious wealth,  of  cultivation  and  thought,  Julia 
Ward  grew  to  womanhood.  By  the  time  she 
w^as  seventeen  she  was  an  acceptable  contribu- 
tor to  the  leading  magazines  of  the  day,  and  at 
the  time  of  her  marriage  with  Dr.  Howe,  in  her 
twenty-fourth  year,  she  had  laid  the  founda- 
tion of  a  successful  literary  career. 

After  a  visit  to  Europe  Dr.  Howe  and  his 
wife,  with  their  baby  daughter,  lived  for  a  short 
time  at  the  Institution  for  the  Blind  near  Bos- 
ton, of  which  Dr.  Howe  was  director.  Dr. 
Howe  had  already  won  fame  for  his  successful 
attempt  to  educate  the  blind  deaf-mute  Laura 
Bridgman,  and  his  noble  w^ork  for  the  blind 
continued  to  engage  his  interest.  He  remained 
director  of  the  institution  all  his  life,  residing 
for  many  years  at  a  charming  country  place 


NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS  21/ 

called  "Green  Peace."  Mrs.  Howe,  from  the 
time  of  her  removal  to  Massachusetts,  became 
identified  with  the  political  and  social  move- 
ments in  which  that  State  always  led.  One 
of  her  children  speaks  of  her  as  having  been  a 
*'  Bostonian  of  the  Bostonians,"  from  the  be- 
ginning of  her  married  life.  It  is  certain  that 
her  own  nature  responded  warmly  to  the  pro- 
gressive New  England  spirit,  and  that  her 
talents  and  earnestness  won  her  a  high  place  in 
the  band  of  men  and  women  who  represented 
New  England  thought. 

In  1853  Mrs.  Howe  published  her  first  vol- 
ume of  poems  under  the  title  Passion  Flowers, 
Although  brought  out  anonymously  the  au- 
thorship was  at  once  accorded  to  Mrs.  Howe 
by  Emerson,  Longfellow,  and  other  poets, 
who  recognized  in  the  verse  her  own  fertile 
fancy.  In  the  following  year  another  volume, 
which  was  largely  an  appeal  for  the  freedom  of 
the  Southern  slaves,  appeared  under  the  title 
Words  for  the  Hour. 

From  this  moment  Mrs.  Howe's  literary  life 
became  identified  with  the  anti-slavery  cause. 


2l8  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN    WRITERS 

Poems,  articles,  editorials,  and  lectures  all 
spoke  the  same  word  for  humanity,  and  the 
author  became  known  as  one  of  the  leaders  in 
the  cause.  The  Battle  Hymn  of  the  Re- 
public only  added  another  laurel  to  the  fame 
she  had  already  won  as  a  tireless,  fearless,  and 
able  advocate  for  the  freedom  of  the  slave. 

When  the  war  was  over  Mrs.  Howe's  pen 
still  wrought  for  large  issues.  Well  known  as 
a  lecturer,  her  efforts  now  were  directed  to 
questions  of  character,  ethics,  and  the  purpose 
of  life.  She  was  still  a  leader  in  the  intel- 
lectual world,  and  the  most  eminent  men  of 
New  England  cherished  her  friendship. 

Almost  from  the  beginning  of  the  move- 
ment Mrs.  Howe  has  been  a  champion  of  the 
woman  suffrage  cause.  She  has  been  one  of 
the  workers  who  have  done  much  for  the 
broader  education  of  women  and  opened  to 
them  wider  spheres  of  usefulness.  But  her 
spirit  is  too  large  to  be  confined  closely  to 
one  interest.  The  world  has  been  her  field  of 
action,  and  whenever  the  word  was  needed 
there  it  has  been  spoken.      In   1867,  when  the 


NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS  219 

Greek  inhabitants  of  the  island  of  Crete  re- 
volted from  the  Turkish  Government,  Mrs. 
Howe  and  her  husband  crossed  the  Atlantic, 
carrying  money  and  supplies  to  the  brave  little 
band  of  rebels.  In  1872  she  was  in  London 
trying  to  bring  about  a  woman's  peace  con- 
gress, having  for  its  object  the  abolition  of  war 
among  civilized  nations. 

When  the  republic  of  Santo  Domingo  desired 
to  be  annexed  to  the  United  States,  Dr.  Howe 
w^as  one  of  the  commissioners  appointed  by 
the  United  States  to  inquire  into  the  feasibility 
of  the  plan.  Dr.  and  Mrs.  Howe  passed  two 
winters  in  the  island,  living  at  one  time  in  one 
of  those  large  marble  houses  which  the  natives 
call  "palaces,"  and  making  journeys  of  in- 
spection as  to  the  wealth  and  resources  of  the 
country.  Their  house  was  guarded  by  native 
soldiers,  and  wherever  they  went  the  inhabi- 
tants vied  with  one  another  in  offers  of  hospi- 
tality and  friendship.  It  was  Mrs.  Howe  who 
revealed  to  these  simple  people  to  what  stature 
womanhood  might  grow.  Her  gracious  influ- 
ence seemed  to  represent  to  them  the  blessings 


220  NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS 

that  might  flow  from  a  union  with  the  great 
republic,  and  it  was  into  her  sympathetic  ear 
they  poured  the  story  of  their  disappointment 
when  their  dream  of  a  larger  national  life  came 
to  an  end. 

In  later  years  Mrs.  Howe's  interests  have 
been  very  closely  connected  with  the  New 
England  Woman's  Club,  an  outgrowth  of  her 
brain,  devoted  to  the  broader  advancement  of 
w^omen.  This  last  project  connects  her  ideals 
closely  with  those  of  her  young  womanhood, 
when  in  all  and  above  all  she  conceived  life  to 
be  but  the  instrument  for  the  working  out  of 
noble  purposes. 

Her  place  in  American  literature  is  repre- 
sentative. While  the  mass  of  her  work  is  of 
necessity  ephemeral,  it  is  yet  of  invaluable 
character.  Whenever,  during  her  career,  the 
nation  has  stood  in  danger  from  foes  within 
or  without,  she  has  come  to  the  front  with  her 
pen  and  the  influence  of  her  noble  personality. 
So  greatly  has  she  wrought  in  this  regard  that 
the  history  of  her  literary  career  would  be  the 
history  of  the  causes  which  have  affected  the 


NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS  221 

national  life  for  the  last  fifty  years.  No  merely 
artistic  gift,  however  great,  could  have  won  for 
her  this  place. 

Louise  Chandler  Moulton,  poet  and  prose 
writer,  was  born  at  Pomfret,  Conn.,  in  1835. 
Around  her  childhood  still  lingered  the  tra- 
ditions of  old  New  England  life,  and  her 
education  was  almost  as  strict  as  that  of  her 
Puritan  ancestors.  Louise  was  taught  her 
catechism  and  the  duty  of  going  to  church 
three  times  on  Sunday,  to  do  her  little  stint  of 
sewing,  and  to  listen  respectfully  while  her 
great  grandmother  read  her  extracts  from  the 
Greek  philosophers  in  the  original.  She  was 
also  taught  that  it  was  sinful  to  read  novels  and 
to  dance,  or  to  play  backgammon.  She  was 
an  only  child,  and  as  she  had  a  loving  little 
heart,  the  affection  her  parents  lavished  upon 
her  made  the  home  atmosphere  most  sweet 
and  sunny.  Like  many  another  New  Eng- 
land child  she  often  forgot  the  terrors  inspired 
by  catechism  and  sermon  to  find  pleasure  in 
the  world  which  she  created  out  of  her  own 


222  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS 

fancy.  This  world  of  imagination  w^as  in  her 
case  peopled  by  creatures  so  real  that  they 
formed  an  actual  part  of  her  life.  Often  the 
same  characters  occupied  her  attention  for 
months,  and  she  would  hurry  away  from  lesson 
and  task  to  live  through  hours  of  emotion  and 
experience  with  these  children  of  her  brain. 
Once  she  spent  a  whole  summer  watching  these 
imaginary  characters  act  what  she  called  a 
"  Spanish  drama."  As  soon  as  she  appeared  in 
the  garden  they  would  flock  around  her  and  go 
through  the  parts  which  they  seemed  them- 
selves to  create  ;  if  they  came  to  grief,  she  was 
genuinely  moved,  and  once,  when  one  of  them 
died,  she  was  utterly  overcome.  Outside  these 
fancies  the  voices  of  nature  awakened  many 
curious  thoughts. 

The  wind  whistling  through  a  certain  key- 
hole seemed  to  her  distant  bugle  notes,  or  the 
wailing  of  lost  souls,  while  the  tones  of  rain  and 
sleet  had  each  alike  its  own  weird  interpreta- 
tions. It  is  from  such  imaginative  children 
that  the  New  England  poets  have  sprung,  and 
when  she  was  about  seven  years  old  the  little 


NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS  223 

day  dreamer  began  to  put  her  thoughts  into 
verse.  Very  curious  bits  of  doggerel  must 
have  been  the  result  of  these  moments  of  in- 
spiration, but  they  no  doubt  expressed  in  some 
queer  fashion  the  fancies  teeming  in  the  rest- 
less little  brain.  When  she  was  fifteen  Louise's 
first  printed  verses  appeared  in  a  Norwich 
newspaper,  and  three  years  later  a  volume  enti- 
tled This,  That,  and  the  Other,  appeared.  In 
this  were  included  the  stories,  poems,  and 
sketches  which  had  been  printed  in  various 
magazines  and  papers,  and  which  had  won  for 
the  young  author  considerable  reputation.  The 
book  was  kindly  reviewed  by  Edmund  Clar- 
ence Stedman  and  other  critics,  and  the  author 
almost  immediately  took  the  position  she  has 
since  held  as  one  of  the  most  sympathetic  of 
New  England  writers.  In  her  prose  work 
Mrs.  Moulton  has  dealt  with  those  studies 
of  character  which  have  such  a  charm  for 
New  England  writers,  and  in  the  portrayal 
of  which  she  has  been  strikingly  successful. 
Her  stories  and  novels  have  appeared  in  book 
form   under   the   titles    This,    That,    and  the 


224  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS 

Other,    Jono    Clifford,    and    Some    Women's 
Hearts, 

Some  charming  books  for  children,  written 
primarily  for  the  amusement  of  her  own  little 
daughter,  show  Mrs.  Moulton's  talent  in  an- 
other light.  These  tales — Bedtime  Stories; 
More  Bedtime  Stories  ;  New  Bedtime  Stories, 
and  Firelight  Stories — have  won  a  wide  hear- 
ing. 

N  But  it  is  by  her  poetry  that  Mrs.  Moulton 
will  be  longest  remembered.  Her  poems  are 
full  of  melody,  of  light,  and  color ;  they  are 
charged  with  an  intense  feeling  for  nature, 
whose  moods  they  reproduce  with  exquisite 
fidelity ;  they  are,  in  most  instances,  singularly 
perfect  in  form,  while  the  beauty  of  certain 
single  lines  stands  unchallenged.  But  above 
all  they  are  the  songs  of  one  who  sings  spon- 
taneously and  naturally,  to  whom  the  outside 
world  and  the  life  of  the  soul  have  alike  re- 
vealed themselves  in  music.  In  them  is  found 
the  true  expression  of  the  author's  gift  as  one 
of  the  best  lyric  poets  of  America.  Some 
single  poems,  as   The  House  of  Death ;  How 


NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS  225 

Long ;  In  Pace ;  and  Left  Behind,  have  won 
a  wide  fame.  Her  poetry  has  been  published 
in  two  volumes,  Swallow  Flights,  and  Other 
Poems, 

Another  writer  of  the  same  generation  as 
Mrs.  Moulton  is  Harriet  Prescott  Spofford, 
daughter  of  Joseph  N.  Prescott,  a  descendant 
of  one  of  the  families  which  have  made  New 
England  famous.  Miss  Prescott's  first  work 
marked  her  at  once  as  a  unique  personality. 
Hitherto  the  fiction  of  New  England  had  been 
stamped  with  a  distinct  moral  purpose  around 
which  the  tale  was  woven.  But  in  the  brilliant 
and  dramatic  novels  Azarian,  Sir  Roha7is 
Ghost,  The  A77iber  Gods,  and  in  the  short 
stories  which  belong  to  the  same  period,  this 
author  seems  to  have  created  an  art  peculiarly 
her  own,  for  above  all  other  things  they  ap- 
pealed to  the  sense  of  beauty.  The  language 
in  which  they  were  written  was  new  to  readers 
of  fiction,  and  they  were  carried  along  by  it 
as  by  beautiful  music.  This  gift  of  expression, 
chastened  later  to  a  severer  beauty,  so  inten- 


226  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS 

sifted  the  charm  of  the  story,  itself  always  dra- 
matic, that  it  seemed  on  first  reading  the 
author  must  have  sacrificed  the  purpose  of  the 
true  story-teller.  But  stripped  of  their  luxu- 
rious dress  the  stories  would  still  remain  genu- 
ine experiences  of  life  in  New  England,  though 
seen  from  a  point  of  view  seldom  attained. 
The  poetic  faculty  so  apparent  in  her  prose 
has  made  Mrs.  Spofford's  verse  equally  felici- 
tous. Her  mood  in  her  earlier  and  perhaps 
most  successful  work  was  an  alien  one  to 
New  England  fiction,  full  of  a  tropical  beauty, 
and  dominated  by  a  rare  imaginative  faculty, 
and  it  will  probably  give  her  contributions  a 
permanent  place  among  New  England  writers. 

Elizabeth  Stuart  Phelps  has,  in  her  stories 
and  novels,  dealt  almost  entirely  with  questions 
of  conscience  and  morality.  She  came  of  a  line 
of  theologians  whose  lives  were  spent  in  discuss- 
ing and  teaching  the  principles  of  puritanism, 
and  much  of  their  seriousness  of  purpose  be- 
came her  inheritance.  Her  first  story  appeared 
in  the  YoutJis  Companion  in  1857,  before  she 


NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS  22/ 

was  fourteen,  and  five  years  later  Harpers 
Magazine  published  her  story,  "  A  Sacrifice 
Consumed,"  one  of  the  first  stories  called  forth 
by  the  war.  The  year  following  she  began 
writing  the  book  which  made  her  famous,  and 
which  appeared  in  1868  under  the  title  The 
Gates  Ajar. 

In  this  story  the  author,  for  the  first  time  in 
American  literature,  showed  how  completely 
the  old  puritan  idea  of  the  hereafter  had 
passed  away.  In  its  place  had  come  a  belief 
in  the  unfailing  love  of  God,  and  a  hope  of 
the  blessedness  of  the  future  life.  The  book 
brought  comfort  and  help  to  thousands  who 
had  outgrown  the  gloomy  creed  of  their  an- 
cestors, and  w^hose  hearts  were  still  mourning 
the  loss  of  friends  who  had  fallen  in  the  war. 

But  although  the  book  achieved  a  remark- 
able success  the  author  did  not  follow  it  with 
others  of  a  similar  character.  She  began  in- 
stead the  publication  of  a  series  of  short  stories 
dealing  wholly  with  the  problems  of  human 
life.  Many  of  these  stories  are  so  sad,  that 
they  seem  to  show  life  only  as  a  tragedy,  but 


228  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS 

the  author's  purpose  was  to  preach  the  truth 
in  order  that  good  might  come  of  it.  These 
stories,  pubHshed  later  under  the  title  Men, 
Women,  and  Ghosts,  were  followed  by  The 
Story  of  Avis,  a  novel  of  remarkable  force. 
Like  her  other  works,  The  Story  of  Avis  is  a 
sermon  thrown  into  the  form  of  fiction,  but 
the  artistic  sense  of  the  author  is  shown  also 
in  this  book  as  in  no  other.  If  Miss  Phelps 
had  not  written  fiction  she  would  still  have 
become  a  poet ;  few  writers  possess  such  in- 
sight, and  fewer  still  are  governed  by  the  sense 
of  beauty  that  dominates  all  her  work.  Her 
fiction  is  full  of  beautiful  lines  showing  the 
finest  sense  of  color,  while  her  volume  of  Po- 
etic Studies  illustrates  how  far  her  poetic  in- 
stinct might  have  reached  had  her  art  been 
confined  to  verse-making. 

The  Story  of  Avis  is  full  of  color  and 
rhythm,  and  is  one  of  the  best  instances  of 
how  far  words  may  be  made  to  reproduce  the 
lights  and  shades  of  the  world  of  nature.  These 
two  characteristics,  the  moral  purpose  and  the 
sense  of   beauty,   have   dominated  all    the  au- 


NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS  229 

thor's  works.  Although  her  later  works,  Dr, 
Zay,  Beyond  the  Gates,  and  others  have  been 
eminently  successful,  yet  she  reaches  her  high- 
est point  in  such  short  stories  as  A  Madonna 
of  the  Tubs,  The  Lady  of  Shalott,  Cloth  of 
Gold,  and  Jack.  In  these  powerful  tales, 
which  read  like  poems,  both  characters  and 
background  are  sketched  in  such  fine  lines  as 
to  place  them  among  the  best  American  fic- 
tion. The  tragedy  of  common  life  which  has 
always  appealed  to  the  author,  and  which  has 
been  her  most  successful  theme,  has  never 
been  more  artistically  treated.  Miss  Phelps 
was  born  in  Boston,  but  her  girlhood  was 
spent  in  the  old  town  of  Andover,  where  her 
father  was  a  professor  of  theology.  She  stud- 
ied mathematics  and  the  classics  at  the  An- 
dover Female  Seminary,  one  of  the  celebrated 
schools  of  the  day,  and,  like  all  the  youth  of 
her  generation,  she  was  taught  that  one  of  the 
chief  duties  of  man  was  to  brood  over  the 
theological  problems  that  had  puzzled  her 
puritan  ancestors.  She  has  lived  the  great- 
er  part   of  her  life    in   Andover.      In    1888 


230  NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS 

she  was   married   to   the   writer,   Herbert   D. 
Ward. 

Lingering  to-day  among  old  New  England 
villages  and  country  sides  are  many  character- 
istics of  other  days.  For,  while  society  has 
been  progressive,  the  people  have  kept  many 
quaint  habits  of  thought  and  speech,  much  in 
the  same  manner  as  they  have  preserved  in 
their  garrets  the  furniture  and  costumes  of 
their  ancestors.  Thus,  the  men  and  women 
found  in  village  and  farm-house  seem  often 
survivals  of  another  generation,  and  the  story 
of  their  simple  lives  is  full  of  interest.  In 
another  generation,  perhaps,  these  types  will 
have  passed  away,  and  the  individuality  which 
has  stamped  New  England  life  from  its  be- 
ginning will  be  lost. 

Mary  E.  Wilkins  has  preserved  in  her 
sketches  of  this  life  many  of  its  unique  char- 
acteristics, and  has  studied  detail  so  carefully 
that  her  work  has  a  distinct  value  in  the  liter- 
ature of  American  social  life. 

No  feature  in  the  apparently  humdrum  ex- 


NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN   WRITERS  23 1 

istence  of  these  people  has  seemed  to  Miss 
Wilkins  uninteresting.  She  makes  us  sym- 
pathize with  their  little  ambitions  and  humble 
denials  and  sacrifices,  until  we  feel  we  have 
entered  into  close  relationship  with  their  lives. 
We  realize  the  misfortune  of  the  poor  old  lady 
who  could  not  afford  a  front  door,  and  see  the 
utter  demoralization  that  follows  when  a  lone 
spinster  loses  her  pet  cat,  her  only  companion 
and  friend.  There  is  a  sermon  preached  in 
the  story  of  the  old  w^oman  who  earned  her 
living  by  making  patchwork  quilts  and  who, 
through  a  mistake,  put  the  pieces  that  be- 
longed to  one  neighbor  into  the  quilt  intended 
for  another.  The  author's  gift,  as  a  genuine 
story-teller,  makes  the  work  alive  with  human 
feeling,  and  gives  to  these  uneventful  tales  the 
charm  of  romance.  Her  power  for  present- 
ing a  picture  is  equally  great.  We  see  the  old 
farm-house  kitchens,  the  sunniest  and  brightest 
parts  of  the  home,  and  have  glimpses,  much 
like  those  that  come  to  the  occupants  them- 
selves, of  the  prim  ''  front  rooms  "  that  are  so 
seldom  used.     We  see,  too,  the  orchards,  mead- 


232  NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS 

ows,  and  fields  rich  with  harvests  or  lying 
bare  under  the  winter  skies ;  every  detail  of 
farm  and  village  life  comes  before  us  vividly 
as  if  photographed  ;  the  farmer  s  wife  busy  in 
the  kitchen,  the  farmer  himself  sowing  or  har- 
vesting, their  son  donning  his  Sunday  clothes 
for  a  visit  to  his  sweetheart,  or  their  daughter 
up  in  her  bedroom  trying  on  the  sheeny  silk 
which  she  is  soon  to  wear  as  a  bride,  are  all 
careful  copies  of  the  originals  whose  personal- 
ity supplies  the  human  interest  in  these  unique 
surroundings. 

From  the  first  appearance  of  the  stories  in 
various  magazines  and  periodicals  Miss  Wilkins 
was  recognized  as  a  writer  whose  work  must 
bear  a  permanent  value.  This  New  England 
life,  with  its  limitations  and  often  unlovely 
characteristics,  was  yet  a  survival  of  the  old 
puritanism,  though  the  spirit  of  the  past  had 
been  in  many  instances  subverted.  Much  of 
the  hardness  and  unresponsiveness  of  these 
people  were  an  inheritance  as  legitimate  as 
their  stern  sense  of  justice  and  love  of  truth. 
Miss  Wilkins,  by  seizing  the  salient  points,  has 


NEW  ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS  233 

given  to  their  characters  just  that  balance  be- 
tween the  old  and  the  new  New  England 
which  really  exists,  though  time  must  speed- 
ily destroy  it. 

The  short  stories  and  sketches  of  Miss 
Wilkins  have  been  published  in  two  volumes, 
under  the  titles  :  A  Hunible  Romance  and  A 
New  England  Nun,  each  book  taking  its 
name  from  the  leading  story.  A  Humble 
Romance  is,  perhaps,  the  best  of  the  short 
stories.  The  descriptions  of  the  tin  pedler 
vending  his  wares  is  like  a  scene  from  Dickens, 
while  the  human  interest  of  the  story  is  traced 
with  the  finest  art. 

Besides  her  short  stories.  Miss  Wilkins  has 
published  two  novels,  Ja7ie  Field  and  Pem- 
broke, the  first  a  charming  love-story  and  the 
second  a  tragic  study  of  the  unlovely  side  of 
rustic  character,  relieved  by  the  sw^eet  and 
steadfast  faith  of  a  young  g^irl.  Some  charm- 
ing stories  for  children  show  Miss  Wilkins^s 
talent  in  a  new  light.  Of  these  You7ig  Lu- 
cretia,  which  gives  the  title  to  the  book,  is 
a  fair  example  of  the  author's  insight  into  the 


234  NEW   ENGLAND   WOMEN   WRITERS 

ambitions  and  interests  of  the  child  mind. 
Young  Lucretia,  who  had  never  had  a  birth- 
day or  Christmas  present,  and  who  lives  with 
some  old  aunts  who  have  long  since  forgotten 
that  they  ever  were  children,  is  a  quaint  little 
picture  of  the  old  puritan  up-bringing  joined 
to  the  usages  of  modern  life.  We  sympathize 
with  the  poor  little  heroine  when  she  has 
to  wear  dresses  made  out  of  her  aunts'  cast-off 
garments,  and  we  do  not  blame  her  for  sur- 
reptitiously conveying  some  packages  to  the 
school -house  Christmas-tree,  so  the  children 
may  not  think  she  is  utterly  without  presents. 
It  was  a  sweet  thought  to  leave  the  little 
maiden  glowing  in  the  happiness  of  a  new- 
fashioned  dress,  with  her  heart  throbbing  over 
the  thoughts  of  a  real  Christmas  party,  and 
with  her  two  eyes  **  shining  softly,  like  stars," 
as  she  gazes  from  the  dusky  fireplace  into  the 
face  of  the  kindly  visitor  who  has  brought  this 
gladness. 

Among  Miss  Wilkins's  other  work  she  has 
given  us  one  reflection  from  those  dark  days 
of  the  Salem  witchcraft.     This  she  has  embod- 


NEW   ENGLAND    WOMEN    WRITERS  235 

ied  in  her  play,  Giles  Corey,  Yeo^nan,  in  which 
all  the  relentless  spirit  of  persecution  is 
pitilessly  portrayed.  Giles  Corey  is  a  study, 
full  of  dramatic  force,  and  dominated  by  the 
tragic  elements  that  underlay  many  phases  of 
puritan  character.  Miss  Wilkins  has  made  in 
this  play  another  claim  to  her  rank  as  the 
greatest  power  in  New  England  fiction  to-day, 
and  as  the  author  whose  artistic  realism  em- 
bodies the  highest  purpose  of  modern  literary 
art 


CHAPTER  XIV 

GEORGE  W.  CABLE 
1844— 

George  W.  Cable  was  born  in  New  Orleans, 
where  his  childhood,  youth,  and  early  manhood 
were  spent.  The  New  Orleans  of  his  child- 
hood—  a  city  of  shrubs  and  flowering  trees, 
of  vegetable  gardens  surrounded  by  palisade 
fences,  of  handsome  old-fashioned  houses,  un- 
paved  streets,  and  empty,  marshy  lots — is  to 
him  a  pleasant  memory.  Through  the  streets 
he  wandered,  with  his  head  full  of  day-dreams, 
and  when  not  busy  with  study  or  play,  formu- 
lated a  plan  of  life  entirely  different  from  that 
he  actually  lived.  A  conscientious  pupil  and 
omnivorous  reader,  his  early  ambitions  were 
still  far  away  from  such  leanings  ;  long  before 
he  had  mastered  his  geography  he  had  deter- 
mined upon  a  career  of  adventure,  and  it  was  a 


GEORGE    W.    CABLE  237 

bitter  disappointment  to  him  to  learn  that  his 
favorite  romance,  Paul  Jones,  the  Son  of  the 
Sea,  was  not  true.  Yet  even  the  names  of  for- 
eign countries  had  a  fascination  for  him,  while 
the  masts  of  the  ships  clustered  at  the  docks 
were  an  inspiration.  Even  the  ballast,  which 
consisted  sometimes  of  stone  from  Spain,  had 
such  an  interest  that  it  led  to  an  attempt  at 
studying  geology. 

Naturally  the  wharves  had  a  great  attraction 
for  such  a  boy,  and  thither  he  used  to  go  with 
his  brother,  day  after  day,  to  watch  the  vessels 
come  in  and  depart,  and  to  weave  stories  about 
their  voyages.  Once  when  a  revenue  cutter 
anchored  across  the  river  the  two  boys,  though 
poor  in  pocket-money,  paid  their  way  over  the 
ferry  in  order  that  they  might  sit  down  upon  a 
stump  of  drift-wood  and  inspect  her  at  leisure. 
Good  fortune  sent  an  official  in  their  way, 
who,  amused  by  their  interest,  invited  them  on 
board,  and  allowed  them  to  inspect  the  various 
quarters,  and  to  hover  with  delight  over  the 
sailors'  lockers,  where  the  thread,  needles,  and 
other  outfittings  suggested   all  the  delights  of 


238  GEORGE   W.    CABLE 

sea  life.  The  fact  that  he  could  not  really 
travel  turned  his  attention,  perhaps,  to  the  lit- 
erature of  travel  and  he  began  writing  a  story 
of  two  Spanish  brothers  who,  in  by-gone  days, 
had  made  a  voyage  from  Spain  to  the  Carib- 
bean Sea.  This  narrative  was  intended  to  em- 
body all  the  wild  and  romantic  tales  that  the 
young  author  had  dreamed  out,  but  only  one 
chapter  was  ever  written,  though  it  was  prom- 
ised a  place  in  a  school  paper  of  which  Cable 
had  been  chosen  editor — because  he  wrote  a 
good  hand.  Much  serious  work  went  on  hand 
in  hand  with  these  day-dreams  and  longings. 
Before  he  was  ten  he  had  read  Hume's  His- 
tory  of  England,  and  had  set  to  work  to  mem- 
orize the  Declaration  of  Independence.  At 
all  times  he  would  rather  study  than  play,  and 
Burns,  Scott,  Cooper,  Shakespeare,  and  the 
Bible  were  read  and  re-read  in  the  intervals  of 
school  work. 

When  he  was  fourteen  his  father  died,  and 
Cable  was  obliged  to  leave  school  and  earn  his 
living.  He  found  employment  in  a  customs 
warehouse,    his    special    work    being   to   put 


GEORGE   W.    CABLE  239 

brands  on  the  different  articles.  This  prosaic 
work  had,  however,  a  certain  charm  for  him, 
and  as  he  marked  the  silks  and  spices  from  the 
East,  the  delft  from  Holland,  olives  from 
Spain,  linens  from  England,  and  calicoes  from 
France,  he  took  many  imaginary  voyages  to 
those  countries.  The  interest  of  the  student 
was  still  strong  within  him,  and  every  possible 
opportunity  for  study  was  embraced. 

When  he  was  nineteen  he  entered  the 
Fourth  Mississippi  Cavalry  and  served  for  the 
remainder  of  the  war,  carrying  his  Latin  gram- 
mar and  reader  all  through  the  campaign. 

The  war  over  Cable  went  back  to  commer- 
cial life ;  no  idea  of  a  literary  career  came  to 
him,  though  from  time  to  time  he  wrote  news- 
paper articles  upon  various  subjects,  and  at  one 
time  was  a  regular  contributor  to  the  New 
Orleans  Picayune,  But  a  student  of  the  best 
fiction  and  of  literary  style,  gifted  with  poetic 
imagination  and  an  intense  feeling  for  hu- 
manity. Cable  found  after  a  time  the  im- 
pulse for  story-telling  strong  upon  him.  This 
was  augmented  by  reading  in  some  old  news- 


240  GEORGE   W.    CABLE 

papers  various  accounts  of  the  life  of  New 
Orleans  in  its  early  days.  The  social  life, 
perhaps,  of  no  other  American  city  had  so 
picturesque  a  beginning.  The  old  French  fam- 
ilies never  became  Americanized  even  after 
the  union  of  Louisiana  with  the  United  States. 
They  kept  their  family  traditions  and  social 
usages,  regarding  the  Yankees  who  came  to 
make  their  home  there  as  intruders.  All  the 
old  French  love  of  gayety,  of  gentle  breeding, 
and  of  refined  living  made  New  Orleans  a  city 
of  which  the  social  life  was  the  leading  feature. 
The  Creoles,  the  descendants  of  the  early 
French  settlers,  remained  French  for  many 
generations,  even  speaking  English  as  foreign- 
ers, long  after  Louisiana  had  begun  to  send 
representatives  to  Congress. 

Many  charming  episodes  of  this  early  life 
were  preserved  in  the  old  newspapers  which 
came  into  Cable's  hands  from  time  to  time,  and 
inevitably  the  long  past  scenes  were  re-lived 
in  his  imagination.  Just  as  inevitably  the  time 
came  when  certain  incidents  and  characters 
wove  themselves  so  distinctly  into  stories  that 


GEORGE   W.    CABLE  24I 

they  had  to  be  written  down,  and  when  Cable 
had  so  transcribed  three  short  stories  his  work 
as  the  portrayer  of  the  old  French  life  of 
Louisiana  had  begun. 

One  of  these  stories,  Sieur  Geo7'ge,  was 
published  in  Scribners  Monthly.  Being  a 
venture  into  new  fields  its  novelty  no  less 
than  its  art  appealed  to  Northern  readers,  and 
when  another  story,  Jean -ah  Poqitelin  ap- 
peared some  time  later  the  author  felt  from  the 
wealth  of  friendly  criticism  that  his  choice  of 
material  had  been  a  w^ise  one.  Other  stories 
were  written,  the  series  being  published  finally 
in  a  book  called  Old  d^eole  Days.  The  suc- 
cess of  this  little  volume  showed  how  truly  the 
author  had  entered  into  the  spirit  of  those  old 
days,  which  had  become  but  a  memory.  His 
next  work  naturally  dealt  with  the  same  period 
in  a  fuller  and  more  picturesque  degree. 

Having  in  view  a  picture  of  strong  lights 
and  shadows,  yet  one  true  to  life.  Cable  chose 
for  his  subject  one  of  the  old  representative 
families  of  New  Orleans,  and  throwing  in  as  a 
background   one    of  the   many  tragedies  that 


242  GEORGE    W.    CABLE 


shadowed  the  history  of  slavery,  he  presented 
a  vivid  and  picturesque  creation  of  historic 
value.  All  the  domestic  and  social  events 
which  would  go  to  make  up  the  history  of 
a  wealthy  and  influential  Creole  family  were 
pressed  into  service,  while  underneath  ran, 
like  a  moral,  the  reflected  purpose  of  a  life 
far  different  from  that  of  the  present  day. 
Cable  supplied  the  tragic  element  of  this 
novel  in  the  story  of  the  negro  B7'as  Coupe, 
who  resisted  authority  because  he  had  been  a 
chief  in  Africa  and  whose  sad  fate  had  been 
discussed  for  generations  around  plantation 
firesides.  But  this  sombre  side  of  the  picture 
was  reheved  by  many  charming  episodes.  All 
the  grace  and  exquisite  gentleness  of  breeding 
for  which  Creole  men  and  women  w^ere  cele- 
brated, made  this  picture  of  old  Creole  life  of 
rare  value.  The  Grandissimes,  whose  family 
name  gave  the  title  to  the  book,  became  a  fa- 
miliar word  as  the  story  of  their  lives  appeared 
from  month  to  month  in  the  magazine  through 
which  it  was  running  as  a  serial.  Although 
The  Grandissimes  was  a  work   of    fiction,   it 


GEORGE   W.    CABLE  243 

created  an  intense  interest  in  the  period  which 
it  described.  Northern  readers  were  especially 
charmed  by  a  view  of  the  luxurious  and  peace- 
ful life  that  went  on  in  Louisiana  while  the 
English  Colonies  were  fighting  the  Indians, 
redeeming  the  soil,  and  finally  winning  their 
independence  as  a  nation.  During  all  this  time 
the  French  in  Louisiana,  both  on  plantations 
and  in  cities,  were  reverencing  their  king,  hold- 
ing to  the  traditions  of  their  ancestors,  and  op- 
posing in  the  end  as  bitterly  as  possible  the 
idea  of  annexation  to  the  United  States. 

The  Creoles  were  pleasure  -  lovers.  They 
had  beautiful  houses  surrounded  by  large  gar- 
dens, and  their  fete  days  were  numerous  and 
strictly  observed.  Much  of  their  enjoyment 
was  of  the  simplest  kind.  The  birthday  of  a 
relative,  or  the  christening  of  a  child  was  made 
the  occasion  for  a  celebration  to  which  all  the 
many  branches  of  the  family  were  invited,  and 
where  merrymaking  went  on  from  morning 
till  night.  Many  striking  scenes  in  The  Gra7i- 
dissimes  illustrate  this  feature  of  Creole  life. 
There  is  also  obvious  throusrhout  the  book,  a 


244  GEORGE   W.    CABLE 

comical  reflection  of  the  resentment  felt  by 
one  member  of  the  family,  because  France  had 
sold  Louisiana  to  the  United  States.  This  in- 
dividual, Raoul  Innerarity  by  name,  even  went 
so  far  as  to  paint  a  large  picture  showing 
Louisiana,  in  the  shape  of  a  badly  drawn  fe- 
male figure,  '*  rif-using  to  hantre  de  h-Union." 
Other  touches  throughout  the  book  show  the 
feeling  that  existed,  while  many  charming  pict- 
ures of  home-life  abound. 

The  Grandissimes  made  Cable  famous. 
Although  it  elicited  much  adverse  criticism 
from  readers  who  denied  its  truthfulness  as  a 
picture  of  old  Creole  days,  it  yet  must  be 
considered  as  one  of  the  best  works  of  fiction 
produced  by  a  Southern  writer.  It  has  been 
followed  by  innumerable  transcriptions  of 
Southern  life  from  other  hands,  but  to  the 
author  of  The  Grandissimes  must  always  re- 
main the  credit  of  being  the  pioneer  in  this 
fascinating  world  of  romance. 

Mr.  Cable's  second  book.  Dr.  Sevier^  deals 
with  the  period  of  the  war,  though  it  is  not 
a  war  story.     The  hero.  Dr.  Sevier,  is  a  noble 


GEORGE   W.    CABLE  245 

character,  whose  forgetfulness  of  self  and  ab- 
sorption in  duty  form  the  theme  of  the  moral 
which  runs  through  the  book.  A  love-story, 
and  the  struggle  of  a  man  with  misfortune, 
some  echoes  of  war  times,  and  many  scenes  of 
New  Orleans  life  in  1863  and  64  are  also  wo- 
ven into  the  story,  which,  although  it  lacks  the 
picturesque  charm  of  The  Gra7idissimes,  is  yet 
valuable  as  a  chronicle  of  many  real  events. 

When  England  took  Canada  from  France, 
and  the  Acadians  were  driven  away  from 
Nova  Scotia  by  the  English,  they  naturally 
sought  refuge  in  the  American  colonies  which 
still  remained  French.  Many  of  them  found 
homes  in  the  West  Indies,  but  many  more  fled 
to  the  lowlands  of  Louisiana,  and  gathering 
together  friends  and  family  formed  themselves 
into  little  homesteads.  Gradually  a  primitive 
agricultural  community  arose  which  differed  in 
almost  every  respect  from  the  plantation 
life  of  Louisiana,  although  the  Acadians  re- 
mained loyally  French. 

They  were  never  very  wealthy,  they  were 
seldom  slave-owners,  their  wives  and  daughters 


246  GEORGE   W.    CABLE 

Still  performed  the  household  work,  and  their 
children,  as  a  rule,  could  neither  read  nor  write. 
But  they  had  kept  a  certain  simpHcity  of  char- 
acter and  an  ideal  of  life  that  made  them  in 
the  main  truthful,  loving,  and  self-respecting. 
Sometimes  their  little  villages  dotted  the  prairie 
lands,  joining  one  another  by  straggling  houses 
and  homesteads  along  the  high  roads.  Some- 
times they  gathered  in  little  hamlets  along  the 
outskirts  of  the  great  plantations,  the  men  and 
women  earning  their  livelihood  in  the  cotton 
and  sugar  fields.  Very  often  they  were  found 
in  the  swamp  lands  and  cities  adapting  them- 
selves to  new  conditions.  But  always  they 
remained  separate  in  habit  and  life  from  the 
Creole. 

To  one  of  these  little  Acadian  settlements 
which  had  growm  up  on  the  Louisiana  prairies 
Mr.  Cable  went  for  the  inspiration  of  his  third 
novel,  Bonaventure.  The  hero,  Bonaventure, 
was  an  orphan  boy  who  was  being  brought  up 
by  the  village  cure.  This  old  priest,  pious,  lov- 
ing, and  beneficent,  saw  in  Bonaventure  a  soul 
that  would  be  sure  to  w^ork  largely  for  good  or 


GEORGE   W.    CABLE  247 

evil,  and  he  watched  over  the  child  with  zeal- 
ous care.  The  story  tells  how  Bonaventure, 
in  the  first  trial  of  his  life  yielded  to  tempta- 
tion, how  he  repented  and  by  self-sacrifice 
wrought  out  his  punishment,  and  how  he  final- 
ly  became  the  great  hope  of  the  Acadians  by 
becoming  a  teacher  and  bringing  to  their  chil- 
dren the  gift  of  education.  The  story  has 
three  divisions,  the  separate  scenes  of  which  il- 
lustrate the  life  of  the  prairies,  the  plantations, 
and  the  swamps  of  Louisiana.  In  each  the 
local  color  is  true  and  effective,  the  scenes  and 
incidents  being  in  many  instances  studies 
which  the  author  made  while  visiting  the  re- 
gions as  an  official  of  the  government. 

This  little  story,  in  which  the  Acadian  was 
introduced  into  literature  for  the  first  time 
since  the  publication  of  Longfellow's  Evange- 
line, shows  Mr.  Cable  at  his  best  as  a  story- 
teller pure  and  simple.  One  of  his  most 
successful  books,  it  is  also  one  in  which  he 
has  incorporated  most  conspicuously  his  own 
large  faith  in  the  possibility  for  good  which  lies 
in  every  human  soul. 


248  GEORGE   W.    CABLE 

During  the  production  of  these  three  novels 
Mr.  Cable  had  also  been  busy  at  other  literary 
work.  Much  of  this  has  been  devoted  to  a 
study  of  Louisiana  and  New  Orleans  from 
a  historical  point  of  view.  Searching  among 
old  records  and  historical  documents,  news- 
papers, and  Government  reports,  he  sifted  out 
the  material  for  a  series  of  brilliant  articles, 
since  published  in  book  form  under  the  title, 
The  Creoles  of  Loziisiaiia.  Here  he  pictured 
the  growth  and  life  of  the  old  colony,  in  poetic 
yet  truthful  words,  which  made  the  record  read 
like  romance,  although  it  was  genuine  history. 
Other  historical  articles,  as  New  Orlea^is  Be- 
fore the  Capture,  and  some  Encyclopaedia 
articles,  further  illustrate  the  author's  power 
for  picturesque  effect  in  dealing  with  facts, 
while  his  Strange  Trice  Stories  of  Loiizszana, 
edited  from  original  documents,  show  how  well 
his  art  can  make  truth  reveal  itself  in  all  the 
fascinating  colors  of  romance.  Madame  Del- 
phine,  another  story  of  Creole  life  ;  and  Johii 
March,  Southerner,  a  story  of  the  time  im- 
mediately following   the   Civil   War,   and   the 


GEORGE   W.    CABLE  249 

scene  of  which  is  laid  partly  in  the  South  and 
partly  in  the  North,  completes  the  list  of  Mr. 
Cable's  novels. 

His  work,  which  first  revealed  the  possi- 
bilities for  literature  that  lay  in  the  old-time 
Southern  life,  created  a  new  field  in  American 
fiction.  Not  only  are  his  stories  valuable 
reminiscences  of  other  days,  but  they  are  full 
of  an  uplifting  faith  in  man  and  in  the  power 
of  goodness  to  adjust  the  many  evils  that 
deface  human  institutions. 

Outside  of  his  other  literary  work,  Mr. 
Cable  has  been  an  aggressive  worker  in  the 
field  of  practical  politics,  writing  many  essays 
upon  the  questions  which  affect  the  state  and 
municipal  government  of  the  Southern  States. 
He  is  also  well  known  as  a  lecturer  and  critic 
upon  literary  art,  and  in  recent  years  he  has 
become  one  of  the  most  popular  platform 
readers,  commanding  large  audiences  wherever 
he  appeared. 

His  home  has  been  for  many  years  at 
Northampton,  Mass.,  from  which  place  as  a 
centre   he   directs  many  interests   outside   his 


250  GEORGE   W.    CABLE 

own  life.  Among  these  may  be  included  a 
number  of  Home  Culture  Clubs,  which  bring 
him  into  touch  with  thousands  to  whom  his 
help  and  advice  are  an  inspiration. 


CHAPTER  XV 

JOHN     FISKE 
1842 — 

In  history  and  philosophy  the  work  of  the 
past  generation  of  American  writers  has  been 
supplemented  by  that  of  John  Fiske,  an  orig- 
inal thinker  whose  writings  rev^eal  much  of  the 
vital  significance  of  scientific  thought. 

John  Fiske  was  born  at  Middletown,  Conn., 
where  he  lived  during  boyhood.  His  grand- 
father's home,  in  which  he  was  bred,  was  a  typi- 
cal New  England  household,  and  he  was  care- 
fully trained  in  all  the  precepts  of  good  conduct. 
One  of  his  first  memories  dates  from  the  time 
when  he  listened  gravely  to  the  discussions  that 
were  frequent  in  the  home  on  religion,  politics, 
and  morals.  From  these  conversations  it  was, 
perhaps,  that  he  very  early  pondered  over  ques- 
tions of  right  and  wrong,  and  settled  the  pres- 


252  JOHN   FISKE 


tige  of  all  the  kings  and  queens  of  the  world — 
which  he  had  learned  in  chronological  order — by 
classifying  them  as  ''  good  "  or  ''  bad."  When 
moral  questions  became  too  hard  for  him  to 
decide  he  would  refer  them  to  some  older  head, 
being  firm  in  the  conviction  that  grown  people 
knew  everything.  Thus  he  once  astonished 
the  cook  by  asking  her  if  Heliogabalus  was 
good  or  bad,  and  he  not  infrequently  puzzled 
other  people  by  his  persistent  effort  after  in- 
formation. 

Fiske  cannot  remember  when  he  learned  to 
read,  but  he  was  studying  Latin  at  six,  and  at 
seven  was  reading  Caesar.  GoldsmitJis  His- 
tory of  Greece,  and  the  History  of  the  Jews,  by 
Josephus,  were  read  before  he  was  nine  years 
old,  with  the  whole  of  Shakespeare,  some  parts 
of  Paradise  Lost,  and  Bunya^is  Pilgrims 
Progress,  the  last  a  special  delight  because 
here  were  argued  those  questions  of  right  and 
wrong  which  always  fascinated  him. 

Notwithstanding  this  serious  bent  of  his 
mind  Fiske  had  a  healthy  boy's  love  of  play 
and  out-of-door  life.     And  in  this  New  Eng- 


JOHN   FISKE  253 


land  home  he  had  also  certain  duties  which  he 
performed  faithfully.  Apart  from  his  love  of 
reading,  and  his  faculty  for  asking  startling 
questions,  he  seemed  on  the  outside  an  ordi- 
nary boy.  Yet  from  his  earliest  years  he  was 
a  thinker.  Just  as  Emerson  in  his  boyhood 
pondered  over  the  meaning  and  uses  of  life,  so 
Fiske  puzzled  over  moral  questions  and  the 
duty  of  man  to  the  race. 

Side  by  side  with  this  seriousness  lay  his  in- 
exhaustible thirst  for  knowledge.  To  satisfy 
this  he  read  and  re-read  every  book  that  he  could 
lay  hold  of.  History  especially  delighted  him. 
By  the  time  he  was  eleven  he  knew  his  Frois- 
sart  as  only  such  a  boy  could.  In  the  lively 
company  of  that  goodly  poet  he  visited  the 
court  of  Edward  III.  and  saw  the  tournaments 
and  pageants,  the  knightly  deeds  and  historic 
spectacles  of  the  age  of  chivalry.  Feudal  cas- 
tles, royal  hunts,  the  clang  of  armor,  and  the 
shouts  of  battle  filled  eye  and  ear  while  he 
wandered  through  those  fascinating  pages, 
though  outside  the  snow  might  be  lying  on 
quiet  New  England  fields,  or  the  sun  shining 


254  JOHN   FISKE 


on  scenes  so  commonplace  that  they  seemed 
part  of  another  world. 

With  equal  delight  he  followed  Gibbon 
through  his  story  of  the  fall  of  Rome,  once  the 
mistress  of  the  world,  and  whose  armies  and 
law-makers  had  moulded  the  modern  nations 
out  of  the  savages  who  lived  on  the  banks  of 
the  Seine,  the  Rhone,  and  the  Thames. 

The  works  of  Robertson  and  Prescott  were 
also  a  never-ending  source  of  pleasure.  Some 
idea  of  the  extent  of  his  general  reading  may 
be  gathered  from  the  fact  that  at  this  time  he 
compiled  from  memory  a  chronological  table 
extending  from  the  age  of  Homer  to  the  year 
1820,  and  filling  sixty  pages  of  a  large  blank- 
book. 

Two  years  later  he  studied  men  from  Hor- 
ace and  Sallust,  Cicero  and  Juvenal,  and  other 
Latin  writers,  and  as  he  had  been  studying 
Greek  for  four  years  he  began  a  course  of  the 
Greek  philosophers,  poets,  and  historians. 

In  the  meantime  there  came  a  desire  to 
write.  By  the  time  he  was  fourteen  this  had 
formulated  itself  into  the  intention  to  write  a 


JOHN   FISKE  255 


work  OL  the  philosophy  of  history.  This  idea 
did  not  seem  in  the  least  unusual,  to  him,  and 
he  was  puzzled  to  find  that  the  minister,  to 
whom  he  confided  his  plan,  did  not  sympathize 
with  him  as  enthusiastically  as  he  had  ex- 
pected. Soon  after  this  Fiske  began  a  course 
of  scientific  study,  taking  up  geology,  zoology, 
botany,  and  kindred  subjects.  By  the  time  he 
was  ready  to  enter  Harvard  he  had  also  taken 
a  course  in  mathematics,  had  studied  navigation 
and  surveying,  was  reading  French,  Italian,  and 
Portuguese,  and  keeping  his  diary  in  Spanish. 

Few  young  men  could  boast  of  such  a  men- 
tal equipment  as  Fiske's  when  he  entered  Har- 
vard in  his  nineteenth  year.  But  great  as  was 
the  knowledge  he  had  absorbed  from  books, 
the  development  of  his  mind  had  been  still 
greater.  Although  in  the  main  unconscious  of 
it,  he  had  become  a  profound  thinker ;  while 
engaged  in  tracing  the  world's  intellectual 
progress  through  ancient  and  modern  times  he 
had  gathered  the  self-poise,  and  command  of 
material  which  made  him,  later,  one  of  the  in- 
tellectual forces  of  his  generation. 


256  JOHN   FISKE 


While  at  Harvard  Fiske  took  a  two-years' 
law  course,  intending  to  practise  for  a  living  ; 
but  he  had  been  moulding  his  life  on  other 
lines,  and  he  found  it  impossible  to  ignore  this 
fact.  Every  detail  of  a  lawyer's  business  was 
distasteful  to  him,  and  after  a  short  trial  he 
gave  up  his  office  and  turned  to  the  literary  life. 
He  had  already  become  known  as  a  writer  for 
reviews  and  other  periodicals,  and  although  his 
friends  thought  it  unwise  for  him  to  place 
dependence  upon  literature,  his  success  soon 
proved  that  his  choice  had  been  a  wise  one. 

In  nearly  every  case  Fiske's  books  have  been 
the  outgrowth  of  lectures  delivered  in  colleges 
and  other  educational  institutions,  or  in  public 
halls.  His  work  has  been  on  two  distinct  lines, 
history  and  philosophy  ;  in  the  first  he  now 
stands  as  an  acknowledged  authority ;  in  the 
second  he  is  known  as  a  brilliant  expositor  of 
Spencer  and  Darwin,  and  as  a  thinker  who  has 
himself  made  a  distinct  contribution  to  the 
theory  of  evolution. 

In  one  of  his  early  books,  Myths  and  Myth 
Makers,   Fiske    relaxed   somewhat    from    his 


JOHN   FISKE  257 


severer    studies    to   trace    in    some    charming 
chapters  the  history  of  various  popular  super- 
stitions and  legends.     While  the  book  shows 
the  hand  of  the  scholar,  it  also  shows  the  light 
fancy  which  he  could   bring  to  play  upon  his 
subject;    the    gift    of   the  story-teller  is  ap- 
parent here,  as  many  of  the  fairy  stories  which 
charm  children  to-day  are   traced  back  to  an 
origin  older  than   the  first  records  of  written 
history.     In  pleasant  fashion  we  are  here  taught 
that  many  popular  heroes  who  have  figured  in 
the  folk-lore   of  England,    France,   Germany, 
and  other  countries,  were,  after  all,  but  wander- 
ing free  lances,  whose  real  home  was  far  away 
in  Asia,  in  those  fertile  table-lands  where  man 
first  learned  to   till   the  soil    and  raise  herds. 
When  that  old  Aryan  race,  the  mother  of  the 
greater    part    of   the  world    to-day,  began    to 
migrate  it  carried  along  with  it  those  heroes. 
Since  that  time  they  have  been  veritable  gyp- 
sies,  taking  up  their   abode   here,   there,   and 
everywhere,  but  keeping  always  close  to  their 
blood    relations,    so    that    whoever    hears  the 
story    of    their     adventures    knows    that    the 
17 


258  JOHN   FISKE 


writer  is  of  the  old  mother  -  race,  and  that 
he  is  but  retelling  the  tales  that  his  kindred 
have  listened  to  for  thousands  of  years. 

Fiske's  most  important  historical  work  is  his 
Discovery  of  America,  In  the  intervals  of 
other  work  he  was  for  a  period  of  thirty  years 
going  over  the  ground  necessary  to  the  ac- 
complishment of  this  great  task. 

Beginning  with  Ancient  America,  he  traced 
the  history  and  achievements  of  the  tribes 
which  existed  ages  ago  on  the  American  Con- 
tinent, and  whose  ruined  temples,  fortifications, 
and  dwellings  were  a  marvel  to  the  European 
discoverers.  The  author's  wide  knowledge  of 
universal  history  and  of  prehistoric  times  en- 
abled him  to  illuminate  his  work  with  many 
pictures  of  wonderful  interest.  Thus  in  de- 
scribing the  Eskimo,  probably  the  first  white 
race  of  America,  he  brings  in  also  the  story 
of  the  cave-dwellers  of  Europe,  from  whom  the 
Eskimo  are  supposed  to  be  descended.  In 
doing  this  he  presents  a  vivid  picture  of  those 
curious  people  who  lived  in  caves  above  the 
shores  of  inland  lakes,  who  hunted  the  mam* 


JOHN   FISKE  259 


moth  and  mastodon,  and  left  behind  them 
many  carefully  drawn  sketches  of  their  war- 
riors and   hunters. 

These  chapters  are  followed  by  others  of 
equal  interest,  in  w^hich  we  trace  the  story 
of  the  ancient  Mexicans  and  Peruvians,  of  the 
Pueblo  Indians,  and  the  tribes  of  the  plains  ; 
then  we  have  accounts  of  the  old  stories 
which  claim  that  the  Chinese  were  the  first 
discoverers  of  America,  these  being  followed 
by  the  tales  of  the  Irish  adventurers,  and  of 
the  vikings.  There  is  also  a  summary  of 
the  fanciful  stories  which  floated  over  Eu- 
rope long  before  the  days  of  Columbus,  in 
which  philosophers,  travellers,  poets,  and 
witches  alike  prophesied  the  existence  of 
another  continent  far  beyond  the  confines  of 
the  Western  Sea.  We  have  also  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  state  of  Europe  during  this  time 
when  men  w^ere  searching  for  Cathay  and 
its  inexhaustible  mines  of  wealth,  or  carrying 
on  the  Crusades,  or  searching  for  the  Indies 
over  new  routes,  on  which  they  supposed — if 
the   world   were   round — they  would   have  to 


26o  JOHN  riSKE 


sail  uphill  and  down-hill  to  reach  the  other 
side. 

With  the  same  fertility  of  resource  the  story 
is  carried  down  through  the  voyages  of  Colum- 
bus and  the  other  explorers,  the  conquest  of 
Peru  and  Mexico,  and  the  colonization  of  the 
New  World  and  its  subsequent  history  until 
1 806,  when  Lewis  and  Clarke  crossed  the  Rocky 
Mountains  by  following  Indian  trails,  to  survey 
the  new  territory  just  bought  from  France  by 
the  Government  of  the  United  States.  This 
work,  which  is  in  reality  a  summary  ot  the 
world's  progress  in  scientific  thought,  shows 
the  authors  conception  of  the  sphere  of  his- 
torical writing.  There  is  a  mastery  of  detail 
which  makes  it  an  invaluable  guide  for  the 
student,  and  a  philosophical  breadth  that  is 
equally  instructive  to  those  who  like  to  trace 
the  events  of  history  to  their  moral  sources. 

Another  valuable  work  is  the  Beginnings  of 
New  Englaitd,  which  was  elaborated  from  a 
course  of  lectures  delivered  at  Washington 
University,  St.  Louis.  This  book  has  a  pecul- 
iar interest  for  American  literature,  as  it  con- 


JOHN   FISKE  261 


tains  a  history  of  the  growth  of  the  idea  of 
popular  government  from  the  earHest  times  to 
the  verge  of  the  American  Revolution.  Com- 
paring the  rule  of  the  ancient  world  with  that 
of  the  modern,  the  author  shows  how  the 
idea  of  popular  government  first  arose,  how  it 
took  root  in  the  Anglo-Saxon  race,  formed  the 
charter  of  English  liberty,  and  finally  was  em- 
bodied in  distinct  form  in  the  English  colonies 
of  the  New  World.  The  story  of  the  Puritan 
settlement  of  New  England,  of  the  warfare  with 
the  Indians,  the  founding  of  Harvard  College, 
and  the  growth  of  civil  institutions,  is  followed 
by  a  recital  of  the  troubles  with  the  mother 
country,  the  tyranny  of  Andros  and  his  over- 
throw as  the  last  royal  governor.  This  work, 
dominated  by  Fiske's  masterly  style,  forms  a 
preface  to  the  American  Revolution,  a  brilliant 
and  learned  history  of  the  causes  that  led  to  the 
revolt,  and  in  a  series  of  luminous  pictures  takes 
us  successively  through  the  scenes  of  the  French 
Alliance,  Valley  Forge,  the  war  on  the  frontier 
and  ocean,  the  treason  of  Arnold,  and  the  final 
victory  at  Yorktown.     Some  of  the  finest  ex- 


262  JOHN   FISKE 


amples  of  the  author's  work  as  a  literary  artist 
are  found  in  this  book.  He  shows  here,  too, 
that  genius  for  characterization  which  marks 
the  true  historian.  Nowhere  in  historical  com- 
position are  shown  more  striking  descriptive 
powers  than  where  he  draws  the  comparison 
between  the  character  of  Benedict  Arnold  and 
the  common  soldier  of  the  Revolution,  who 
held  the  honor  of  his  country  sacred,  and  who 
counted  personal  loss  as  nothing  in  the  accom- 
plishment of  a  holy  trust. 

The  C^'itical  PeiHod  of  Ai7ierica7i  History 
follows  naturally,  taking  up  the  period  from 
the  end  of  the  Revolution  to  the  inauguration 
of  Washington.  The  Revolution  had  left  the 
colonies  free  from  British  rule,  but  there  was 
still  no  bond  of  union  between  them.  Each 
State  was  independent  of  every  other,  and  it 
seemed  for  a  time  that  although  they  had 
fought  side  by  side  for  freedom,  jealousies  and 
misunderstandings  would  now  keep  them  far 
apart.  The  wisest  men  of  the  age  saw  the  need 
of  a  general  government  to  which  all  should  be 
equally  bound,  and  for  many  years  their  efforts 


JOHN   FISKE  263 


were  directed  toward  this  end.  Fiske  relates 
the  story  of  this  critical  period,  during  which  it 
seemed  sometimes  that  the  States  were  drifting 
toward  anarchy,  so  impossible  was  it  for  them 
to  decide  upon  a  concerted  plan  of  action. 
Finally,  however,  after  a  succession  of  leagues, 
conventions,  and  federations,  the  States,  one  by 
one,  accepted  the  Constitution  as  it  was  laid 
before  the  Legislature  of  Pennsylvania  by 
Franklin,  and  the  United  States  took  their 
place  as  a  nation.  This  work  is  one  of  the  most 
important  contributions  ever  made  to  the  his- 
tory of  the  United  States,  and,  like  the  author's 
other  work,  it  is  dignified  in  diction,  lucid  in 
style,  and  abounds  with  a  wealth  of  material 
that  makes  it  serve  as  a  text-book  for  the  stu- 
dent as  well  as  a  volume  for  the  general  reader. 
hi  American  Political  Ideas  Fiske  traces 
the  growth  of  American  political  life  from  the 
primitive  town-meeting  of  the  early  settlers  to 
the  rise  of  great  civil  institutions.  The  book 
has  a  particular  interest  as  showing  how  the 
Anglo-Saxon  race  through  all  its  wanderings 
has  still  kept  to  its  early  traditions. 


264  JOHN   FISKE 


Apart  from  his  historical  work  the  genius 
of  Fiske  has  found  its  best  expression  in  his 
philosophical  writings.  His  Cosmic  Philoso- 
phy,  the  earliest  of  his  philosophical  works, 
embodied  the  discoveries  of  Darwin  and  the 
other  great  evolutionists.  In  this  as  in  all  his 
works  Fiske  has  consistently  persevered  in 
preaching  the  doctrine  that  moral  ideas  under- 
lie all  great  scientific  discoveries,  and  that  evo- 
lution is  the  means  used  to  develop  the  race 
spiritually.  In  his  Destiny  of  Man  and  The 
Idea  of  God,  this  idea  is  illustrated  by  argu- 
ments so  forcible,  and  by  so  clear  an  insight, 
as  to  give  the  author  high  rank  as  a  teacher  of 
spiritual  truths. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

MARK   TWAIN 
(Samuel  L.  Clemens) 

1835— 

Among  the  writers  who  have  added  greatly 
to  American  literature  by  transcribing  the 
humor  that  lies  in  the  American  nature,  the 
one  who  has  won  distinction  under  the  pen 
name  of  Mark  Twain  perhaps  ranks  first 

Samuel  L.  Clemens  was  born  in  Florida, 
Mo.,  in  1835,  but  while  very  young  his  family 
removed  to  Hannibal,  on  the  banks  of  the 
Mississippi,  where  his  childhood  was  spent. 
The  Hannibal  of  that  day  was  a  typical  river 
town  of  the  West,  whose  existence  depended 
upon  the  traffic  brought  to  it  by  the  passage 
of  the  steamboats  up  and  down  the  Mississippi. 
This  river  was  then  the  great  highway  between 
the  States  of  the    Middle  West  and  New  Or- 


266  MARK   TWAIN 


leans,  the  depot  to  which  was  taken  much  of 
the  produce  from  the  farms  and  plantations 
along  its  banks.  All  the  towns  and  villages 
along  the  Mississippi,  from  New  Orleans  up- 
ward for  hundreds  of  miles,  depended  largely 
upon  the  river  for  means  of  communication 
with  the  rest  of  the  world ;  the  flat  -  boats, 
keel-boats,  rafts,  and  steamers  that  passed  in 
endless  succession  up  and  down  were,  as  a  rule, 
manned  by  men  from  the  river  towns,  and  it 
was  the  height  of  every  boy's  ambition  to  be 
a  steamboat  captain,  or  failing  that,  a  pilot, 
deck-hand,  or  even  cabin-boy. 

In  his  book  Life  07i  the  Mississippi  Mark 
Twain  has  given  us  a  sketch  of  the  typical  boy 
of  his  early  days,  who  only  knew  real  happi- 
ness during  the  short  time  occupied  by  the  lad- 
ing and  unlading  of  the  freight  from  the  two 
steamboats  that  passed  daily  by  Hannibal.  He 
says  that  the  town  was  really  awake  only  dur- 
ing these  two  intervals,  and  that  after  the  last 
boat  had  steamed  away  again,  Hannibal  went 
to  sleep  and  slept  until  time  for  the  appearance 
of  the  next  day's  boat. 


MARK  TWAIN  2^ 


Like  the  other  boys  of  the  village,  Samuel 
Clemens  desired  above  all  other  things  to  be  a 
pilot  on  one  of  the  steamers  that  plied  be- 
tween St.  Louis  and  New  Orleans.  But  as 
his  family  objected  to  this  occupation  for  him 
he  was  apprenticed,  at  the  age  of  thirteen,  to 
a  printer;  after  learning  his  trade  he  visited 
various  cities  and  worked  at  the  printer's  case 
in  St.  Louis,  Cincinnati,  Philadelphia,  New 
York,  and  many  smaller  towns.  But  dissatis- 
fied with  this  Hfe  he  finally  returned  West  and 
fulfilled  the  ambition  of  his  boyhood  by  be- 
coming a  pilot  on  the  Mississippi. 

Life  on  the  Mississippi  is  full  of  the  detail 
that  characterized  the  lives  of  the  boatmen  of 
that  day,  and  it  contains,  besides,  many  pict- 
uresque illustrations  of  a  phase  of  American 
society  that  was  confined  to  that  period  and 
place  alone. 

It  is  therefore  a  genuine  bit  of  local  history 
from  the  pen  of  a  native  historian,  and  it  has 
its  own  place  in  any  study  of  American  social 
life.  Not  the  least  amusing  and  interesting  of 
these    sketches    is  the  one    describing  what  a 


268  MARK  TWAIN 


river  pilot  had  to  learn  in  the  days  of  Mr. 
Clemens's  youth. 

The  boys  of  Hannibal  had  supposed  that 
the  least  intelligent  of  them  could  readily 
learn  to  be  a  pilot  in  a  few  hours — it  seemed 
so  easy  just  to  steer  in  and  out  of  the  docks, 
to  keep  clear  of  other  boats,  and  to  guide  up 
or  down  mid-stream.  But  the  youthful  adven- 
turer who  actually  stood  beside  the  pilot  at 
the  wheel,  taking  his  first  lesson  in  river  navi- 
gation, found  that  learning  to  steer  was  not  so 
easy. 

Mark  Twain  says  that  the  pilot  on  his  boat 
was  expected  to  know  every  bend  and  point 
on  the  Mississippi  River  for  fifteen  hundred 
miles  and  how  they  looked  in  daylight,  at  dusk, 
and  at  night ;  how  their  shapes  might  change 
as  the  river  twisted  and  turned  ;  how  they 
looked  when  the  shadows  hung  around  them 
on  moonlit  nights ;  how  to  tell  them  from  the 
shadows  themselves,  and  how  to  feel  their  pres- 
ence when  the  blackness  was  so  great  that  no 
man  could  see  anything  a  yard  ahead.  The 
pilot  was    also    supposed  to  know  the   depth 


MARK  TWAIN  269 


and  width  of  the  river  at  every  point ;  to  be 
acquainted  with  every  rock,  snag,  and  bar,  isl- 
and, and  reach  ;  to  know  every  plantation  be- 
tween St.  Louis  and  New  Orleans,  and  thus 
be  able  to  land  any  travelling  planter  at  his 
own  door.  But  intricate  as  this  knowledge 
seemed,  Mark  Twain  was  able  at  last  to 
master  it,  and  he  became  one  of  the  best 
pilots  on  the  river.  He  was  able  also  to  store 
his  mind  full  of  pictures  of  river  hfe,  and 
when  he  reproduced  them  many  years  after- 
ward in  Life  on  the  Mississippi,  the  reader 
was  able  to  see  again  the  busy  life  of  those 
long  past  days.  Incorporated  into  the  pilot's 
story  are  also  many  interesting  accounts  of  in- 
cidents and  persons  in  some  w^ay  identified 
with  the  region.  The  visit  of  Charles  Dick- 
ens and  of  Mrs.  Trollope,  an  account  of  the 
Mardi  Gras,  some  old  Indian  legends,  and  a 
visit  to  Mr.  Cable,  who  had  just  published 
The  Grandissimes,  brings  the  narrative  down 
to  the  present  day  and  summarizes  the  develop- 
ment of  that  part  of  the  West  and  South. 
In  his  twenty-sixth  year  Mark  Twain  ceased 


270  MARK  TWAIN 


to  be  a  pilot,  and  for  the  next  few  years  be- 
came a  wanderer,  visiting  Nevada,  California, 
and  other  Western  States,  the  Sandwich  Islands, 
and  finally  New  York,  where  he  published  his 
first  book  under  the  name  that  has  won  him 
fame,  and  w^hich  was  taken  from  the  old  river 
measurement,  "  Mark  twain."  The  principal 
story  of  this  first  book.  The  Jiimphig  F^'og 
and  Other  Stories,  had  previously  appeared 
in  a  newspaper,  and  with  the  other  sketches 
had  won  for  the  author  some  reputation. 
He  had  during  his  travels  been  clerk,  news- 
paper reporter,  editor,  and  lecturer,  being 
sometimes  successful  and  often  unsuccessful. 
Now,  wnth  a  desire  to  see  more  of  life  he  sailed 
for  Europe.  Two  years  later  appeared  an  ac- 
count of  his  European  journey  in  the  book  en- 
titled The  Innocents  Abroad.  It  was  this  book 
which  in  a  few  months  made  the  author  famous 
wherever  the  English  language  was  spoken. 
Professedly  a  book  of  travel  it  was  in  reality 
a  burlesque  on  books  of  travel.  From  first  to 
last  the  pages  w^ere  full  of  comical  descriptions 
of    all   that    travellers   had    hitherto    revered. 


MARK  TWAIN  2/1 


Historical  cities,  palaces,  museums,  works  of 
art,  even  the  very  rivers  and  mountains  that  had 
helped  to  make  history  were  by  this  irreverent 
scribe  made  to  take  on  lights  and  colors  so  hu- 
morous that  it  seemed  as  if  the  author  had  dis- 
covered a  new  Europe.  The  hinocents  Abroad 
experienced  a  success  accorded  to  few  books. 
It  had  an  immense  sale,  and  so  universal  was 
the  appreciation  of  it  that  even  the  mention  of 
the  author's  name  would  evoke  a  smile.  In 
his  next  two  books,  Roughing  It  and  The 
Gilded  Age,  Mr.  Clemens  portrayed  Ameri- 
can life  on  the  plains,  and  as  represented  by  the 
character  of  Colonel  Sellers,  one  of  those  im- 
practical enthusiasts  whose  schemes  for  making 
money  without  work  forms  the  background  for 
a  character  sketch  so  vivid  that,  thrown  into 
dramatic  form,  it  has  proved  one  of  the  most 
successful  of  modern  plays  of  its  class. 

But  Mark  Twain's  love  of  humor  and  his 
indescribable  faculty  for  seeing  the  funny  side 
of  everything  are  closely  balanced  by  his  pow- 
er as  a  student  of  human  nature  and  by  his 
genius  for  the  pathetic.      His  first  works  be- 


272  MARK   TWAIN 


longed  strictly  to  the  domain  of  humorous 
literature,  but  his  later  work  has  shown  the 
serious  side  of  his  nature  and  his  attainment 
both  as  a  student  of  books  and  of  men.  A 
striking  example  of  this  is  found  in  some  of  his 
juvenile  works  where  are  strongly  seen  the  ten- 
der sympathy  of  the  man  with  all  the  impracti- 
cal and  romantic  schemes  of  boyhood,  and  the 
fine  vision  which  sees  in  the  ambition  of  the 
child  the  impulse  that  often  leads  to  noble 
manhood. 

In  one  of  these  juveniles.  The  Adveiitm^es 
of  Huckleberry  Fi7in,  the  author  has  taken  for 
his  hero  a  typical  boy  who  belonged  to  Han- 
nibal as  it  was  in  Mr.  Clemens's  youth.  This 
boy  is  made  to  do  all  the  things  that  the  young 
Samuel  Clemens  and  his  friends  wanted  to  do 
and  could  not.  He  runs  away  from  home, 
lives  on  the  Mississippi  for  days  on  a  raft,  and 
has  all  the  adventures  that  were  dreamed  of  by 
the  boys  whose  horizon  was  bounded  by  the 
great  river  that  was  at  once  their  pride  and 
their  despair.  Httckleberry  Finn,  outside  its 
romance,  is  also  a  careful  study  of  types  that 


MARK   TWAIN  273 


abounded  in  the  West.  Negro  dialect  and 
backwoods  speech,  the  manners  of  the  river 
boatmen  and  the  customs  of  the  lower  class  of 
Missouri  landsmen,  are  all  woven  into  the 
story  with  the  nicest  art  and  serve  to  make  it 
a  delineation  of  high  artistic  value. 

In  another  book,  Tom  Sawyer,  Huckleberry 
Finn  appears  as  the  friend  of  the  hero,  and 
hand  in  hand  these  two  boys  walk  through 
the  pages  of  an  ideal  boys'  book,  one  in  which 
pluck,  manliness,  and  heroism  form  the  motive 
for  the  action,  at  once  simple,  natural,  and 
sincere.  These  two  books,  with  Life  on  the 
Mississippi,  are  studies  that  American  litera- 
ture is  much  the  richer  for.  They  are  distinct 
from  other  sketches  of  social  Hfe  in  dealing 
with  a  class  that  had  hitherto  been  unchron- 
icled,  and  they  place  the  author  among  the 
valued  contributors  to  the  history  of  American 
social  customs. 

A  book  that  departs  entirely  from  this  view 

of  life  is  The  Prince  and  the  Pauper,  a  study 

of  life  in  the  days  of  the  young  King  Edward 

VI.  of   England.     In  this  book  Mr.  Clemens 
18 


274  MARK   TWAIN 


takes  for  his  theme  a  subject  which  he  says 
may  be  history,  or  only  legend  or  tradition,  and 
adds  that  the  events  chronicled  may  have  hap- 
pened or  may  not  have  happened,  but  at  any 
rate  they  could  have  happened.  Thereupon 
he  spins  a  pretty  story  about  Edward  VI.  and 
the  little  pauper,  Tom  Canty,  who  by  the 
simple  expedient  of  exchanging  clothes  with 
each  other  set  the  whole  kingdom  by  the  ears 
and  nearly  lost  Edward  his  crown. 

Many  pictures  out  of  English  history  are 
woven  into  this  story  in  a  way  that  shows 
the  careful  research  of  the  student.  London 
in  the  early  part  of  the  sixteenth  century, 
with  its  palaces  and  wretched  beggars'  hovels, 
with  its  famous  Tower  full  of  prisoners  of 
noble  birth,  and  its  military  parades  and  street 
fights  between  apprentices  and  serving-men, 
passes  before  the  eye  like  a  panorama,  while 
the  picture  of  the  little  king,  who,  clothed  in 
rags  and  mistaken  for  a  beggar,  still  de- 
mands homage  from  every  one,  is  startlingly 
true  to  the  age  when  royalty  was  considered  a 
divine   right   and  the  king's   person   a  sacred 


MARK  TWAIN  2/5 


thing.  The  story,  which  takes  the  unhappy 
Edward  over  many  rough  ways  and  in  much 
strange  company,  in  which  he  travels  with  beg- 
gars, thieves,  and  outcasts,  is  full  of  many 
pathetic  incidents  which  illustrate  the  society 
of  the  day.  A  few  brief  descriptions  here  and 
there  show  the  author  at  his  best  as  a  lover 
of  his  kind  and  the  possessor  of  broad  and  no- 
ble sympathies. 

Another  book  of  which  old  English  scenes 
form  the  inspiration  is  A  ConnecticMt  Ya7ikee 
in  King  Arthurs  Court.  Here  the  author 
takes  for  his  hero  a  typical  Connecticut  Yan- 
kee of  the  nineteenth  century,  and  transports 
him  back  to  the  days  of  the  Round  Table. 
The  hero's  adventures  with  King  Arthur  and 
Lancelot,  his  contempt  for  the  usages  of  chiv- 
alry, and  his  disgust  at  the  ignorance  of  the 
knights  of  the  Round  Table,  are  amusingly 
detailed  by  the  hero  himself,  who  by  his  knowl- 
edge of  modern  science  outdoes  the  magic  of 
Merlin,  introduces  telephones  and  bicycles  into 
the  country,  starts  factories,  schools,  and  poly- 
technic institutions,  and  is  only  kept  from  mak- 


2/6  MARK  TWAIN 


ing  a  modern  nation  of  ancient  Britain  by  the 
discovery  that  the  people  themselves  do  not 
want  these  changes,  that  they  are  content  with 
their  own  ignorance  and  Merlin's  magic,  and 
that  progress,  as  known  to  Yankeeland,  is  a 
thing  they  will  have  nothing  of. 

Pudd'n-  Head  Wilson  is  another  story  of 
American  life  strong  in  conception  and  vig- 
orous in  handling.  In  some  ways  this  book 
shows  Mark  Twain  at  his  highest  point,  as  the 
keen  observer  and  critic  who  can  read  the  emo- 
tions of  the  soul  and  out  of  the  study  build  up 
one  of  those  characters  in  whose  delineation 
modern  fiction  is  so  successful.  Tom  Sawyer, 
the  boy,  and  Piidd'n-Head  Wilson,  the  man, 
alike  belong  to  the  American  novels  that  will 
live.  In  these,  as  in  all  his  later  w^ork,  though 
the  humor  is  always  present  it  is  the  graver 
side  of  life  that  claims  attention  and  shows  the 
author  as  the  careful  student  of  character. 

Mark  Twain's  latest  book.  The  Personal 
Recollections  of  Joan  of  Arc,  is  a  beautiful 
chronicle  of  the  brave  maid  of  Orleans  whose 
story  has  touched  the  world  for  hundreds  of 


MARK   TWAIN  2^^ 


years.  Mr.  Clemens  spent  a  year  in  Paris 
getting  material  for  this  work  ;  he  became  a 
frequenter  of  libraries  and  a  student  of  old 
records  and  memoirs,  pursuing  his  study  with 
all  the  zeal  of  the  historian.  His  industry  was 
rewarded  by  the  production  of  a  beautiful  his- 
torical romance,  in  which  the  character  of  Joan 
shines  fair  and  true  amid  the  actual  surround- 
ings that  girt  her  short  life.  Nowhere  in  his 
work  is  more  apparent  his  reverence  for  wom- 
anhood and  his  appreciation  of  fine  charac- 
ter than  in  this  tender  portrait  of  the  young 
girl  whose  tragic  fate  he  made  his  theme. 

Mr.  Clemens's  home  is  in  Hartford,  Conn., 
where  he  has  lived  for  many  years.  Outside 
his  literary  career  he  is  known  as  a  lecturer  of 
singular  success,  and  within  and  far  beyond  the 
home  circle  he  is  cherished  for  those  fine  graces 
of  character  and  that  sympathetically  affection- 
ate nature  which  have  won  him  innumerable 
friends. 


5         )   J        3    3 
J         3   J33      3 

3    3       33'      3 


r 


'^iW^Ta*